0% found this document useful (0 votes)
845 views216 pages

ECM-2 Instruction Manual, Rev D2-9411300990

Uploaded by

Eng M Elseaidy
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
845 views216 pages

ECM-2 Instruction Manual, Rev D2-9411300990

Uploaded by

Eng M Elseaidy
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FOR
ECM-2
Excitation Control Module

Publication: 9411300990
Revision: D2 Mar-19
en WARNING: California's Proposition 65 requires special warnings for products that may contain chemicals
known to the state of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Please note that by
posting this Proposition 65 warning, we are notifying you that one or more of the Proposition 65 listed chemicals
may be present in products we sell to you. For more information about the specific chemicals found in this product,
please visit https://www.basler.com/Prop65.
fr AVERTISSEMENT : La Proposition 65 de la Californie exige des avertissements spéciaux pour les produits
pouvant contenir des substances chimiques reconnues par l’État de Californie comme pouvant causer le cancer,
des malformations congénitales ou d’autres problèmes de reproduction. Veuillez noter qu'en publiant cet
avertissement de la Proposition 65, nous vous avisons que les produits que nous vous vendons peuvent contenir
une ou plusieurs des substances chimiques répertoriées dans la Proposition 65. Pour plus d'informations sur les
substances chimiques spécifiques contenues dans ce produit, veuillez consulter https://fr.basler.com/La-
Proposition-65.
es ADVERTENCIA: La Proposición 65 de California requiere la inclusión de advertencias especiales en
productos que pueden contener sustancias químicas conocidas en el estado de California como causantes de
cáncer, defectos de nacimiento y otros daños reproductivos. Por favor tenga en cuenta que al publicar esta
advertencia según la Proposición 65, estamos notificándole que uno o más productos químicos allí listados
pueden estar presentes en los productos que le vendemos. Para obtener más información sobre los productos
químicos específicos que este producto contiene, visite https://es.basler.com/Proposición-65.
zh 警告: 加州第65号提案要求对可能含有加州已知的致癌的、导致先天缺陷或其他生殖伤害的化学物质的产品发出
特别的警告。请注意,通过发布此65号提案警告,我们通知您,我们出售给您的产品中可能含有一种或多种第65号
提案所列出的化学品。有关此产品中发现的特定化学物质的更多信息,请浏览https://cn.basler.com/第65号提案.

ru Предупреждение: В соответствии с Положением 65 штата Калифорния продукция с возможным


содержанием химических веществ, о которых в штате Калифорния известно, что они вызывают рак,
врожденные дефекты или иные нарушения репродуктивной функции, должна снабжаться специальными
предупреждениями. Обращаем ваше внимание, что размещая настоящее предусмотренное Положением
65 предупреждение, мы уведомляем о возможном наличии в продаваемой нами продукции одного или
более химических веществ, приведенных в перечне Положения 65. Более подробную информацию о
конкретных химических веществах, содержащихся в данной продукции, можно найти на веб-сайте
https://ru.basler.com/Предложение-65.
de Warnung: Die California Proposition 65 erfordert besondere Warnhinweise für Produkte, die möglicherweise
Chemikalien enthalten, die im Bundesstaat Kalifornien dafür bekannt sind, dass sie Krebs, Geburtsfehler oder
andere Fortpflanzungsschäden hervorrufen können. Bitte nehmen Sie zur Kenntnis, dass wir Sie durch die
Veröffentlichung dieser Warnung nach Proposition 65 darüber informieren, dass eine oder mehrere der in
Proposition 65 aufgeführten Chemikalien in Produkten enthalten sein können, die wir Ihnen anbieten. Weitere
Informationen zu den spezifischen Chemikalien in diesem Produkt finden Sie unter
https://de.basler.com/Proposition-65.
pt Aviso: A Proposição 65 da Califórnia, EUA, exige a comunicação de avisos especiais com relação a produtos
que possam conter produtos químicos conhecidos no estado da Califórnia, EUA, como causadores de câncer,
defeitos de nascença ou outros danos reprodutivos. Observe que, ao publicar este aviso da Proposição 65,
estamos comunicando que um ou mais dos produtos químicos listados na Proposição 65 podem existir em
produtos que vendemos para você. Para obter informações adicionais sobre os produtos químicos específicos
existentes neste produto, acesse https://www.basler.com/Prop65.
it Avvertenza: La legge Proposition 65 della California richiede avvertenze speciali per i prodotti che possono
contenere sostanze chimiche che, come è noto allo stato della California, possono causare cancro, difetti
congeniti o altri danni riproduttivi. Si prega di notare che, con la pubblicazione di questa avvertenza relativa alla
Proposition 65, vi informiamo che nei prodotti che vi vendiamo possono essere presenti una o più delle sostanze
chimiche elencate nella Proposition 65. Per ulteriori informazioni sulle sostanze chimiche specifiche presenti in
questo prodotto, visitate il sito https://www.basler.com/Prop65.
bg Предупреждение: Калифорнийското предложение 65 изисква специални предупреждения за продукти,
които съдържат химикали, за които е известно в щата Калифорния, че могат да причинят рак, да увредят
плода в утробата или да доведат до други репродуктивни увреждания. Моля, обърнете внимание на това,
че като публикуваме това предупреждение на предложение 65, ние ви уведомяваме, че е възможно един
или повече химикали, изброени в предложение 65, да се съдържат в продуктите, които ви предлагаме. За
повече информация относно специфичните химикали, съдържащи се в този продукт, моля, посетете
https://www.basler.com/Prop65.
9411300990 Rev D i

Preface
This instruction manual provides information about the installation and operation of the ECM-2 Excitation
Control Module. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:
• General Information
• Indicators and Interfaces
• Functional Description
• Mounting
• Terminals and Connectors
• BESTCOMS™Pro Software
• Commissioning
• Modbus™ Protocol
• Maintenance
• Specifications

Warning!

To prevent personal injury or equipment damage, only qualified


personnel should install, operate, or service this system.

Conventions Used in this Manual


Important safety and procedural information is emphasized and presented in this manual through
Warning, Caution, and Note boxes. Each type is illustrated and defined as follows.

Warning!

Warning boxes call attention to conditions or actions that may cause


personal injury or death.

Caution
Caution boxes call attention to operating conditions that may lead to
equipment or property damage.

Note
Note boxes emphasize important information pertaining to installation
or operation.

ECM-2 Preface
ii 9411300990 Rev D

12570 State Route 143


Highland IL 62249-1074 USA
www.basler.com
info@basler.com
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351

© 2017 by Basler Electric


All rights reserved
First printing: December 2011

Warning!

READ THIS MANUAL. Read this manual before installing, operating, or maintaining the ECM-2 Note
all warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual as well as on the product. Keep this manual with the
product for reference. Failure to follow warning and cautionary labels may result in personal injury or
property damage. Exercise caution at all times.

Basler Electric does not assume any responsibility to compliance or noncompliance with national code, local code,
or any other applicable code. This manual serves as reference material that must be well understood prior to
installation, operation, or maintenance.

For terms of service relating to this product and software, see the Commercial Terms of Products and Services
document available at www.basler.com/terms.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual provide
data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design of all features
and options are subject to modification without notice. Over time, improvements and revisions may be made to this
publication. Before performing any of the following procedures, contact Basler Electric for the latest revision of this
manual.

This product contains, in part, open source software (software licensed in a way that ensures freedom to run, copy,
distribute, study, change, and improve the software) and you are granted a license to that software under the terms
of either the GNU General Public License or GNU Lesser General Public License. The licenses, at the time of sale
of the product, allow you to freely copy, modify, and redistribute that software and no other statement or
documentation from us, including our End User License Agreement, places any additional restrictions on what you
may do with that software.
For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of this product, a machine-readable copy of the complete
corresponding source code for the version of the programs distributed to you will be sent upon request (contact
information is provided above). A fee of no more than our cost of physically performing the source code distribution
is charged.
The source code is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY REPRESENTATION or
WARRANTY or even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Refer to the source code distribution for additional restrictions regarding warranty and copyrights.
For a complete copy of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 or GNU LESSER GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 refer to www.gnu.org or contact Basler Electric. You, as a Basler
Electric Company customer, agree to abide by the terms and conditions of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991 or GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999, and as such
hold Basler Electric Company harmless related to any open source software incorporated in this product. Basler
Electric Company disclaims any and all liability associated with the open source software and the user agrees to
defend and indemnify Basler Electric Company, its directors, officers, and employees from and against any and all
losses, claims, attorneys' fees, and expenses arising from the use, sharing, or redistribution of the software.
Review the software website for the latest version of the software documentation.
The English-language version of this manual serves as the only approved manual version.

Preface ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D iii

Revision History
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the ECM-2 firmware and
software. The corresponding revisions made to this instruction manual (9411300990 Rev D) are also
summarized. Revisions are listed in chronological order.

Application Firmware
Version and Date Change
1.00.00, Oct-11 • Initial release
1.01.00, Mar-13 • Added MBIN, ROC, and REF_ADJ logic blocks
• Updated Modbus® mapping
1.01.01, May-13 • Corrected communication error between ECM-2 and BCMs
when communication with one of the BCMs is interrupted
1.01.02, Jul-13 • Corrected reset behavior of LOS2 output
• Corrected ECM-2 rebooting behavior when connected to
corrupted USB circuitry
• Adjusted code to reboot the ECM-2 if an FPGA error is
detected
1.01.03, Aug-13 • Corrected update behavior of UEL and MEL curve points
displayed in BESTCOMS™Pro
• Converted temperature outputs of the BCM_DATA blocks from
integer to float
1.02.00, Jan-14 • Added Modbus metering of MEL_P and UEL_P setpoints
• Corrected AUTO_SYNC block behavior during low generator or
bus frequencies
• Stopped initiating of data logger due to ECM-2 control power
cycling
• Corrected BRIDGES_ON output of BRG_CONFG block from
integer to float
• Corrected event recorder behavior
1.02.01, Aug-14 • Added Modbus metering of time and date
• Added integrator initialization in bypass to VFG block
• Corrected possibility of SCR misfire when firing angle oscillates
around a specific threshold
• Enabled the analog outputs to be tied together between ECM-2
controllers
• Corrected random frequency perturbation
• Corrected event recorder capture of pre-trigger samples
• Revised the generator simulation saturation coefficient to
comply with the industry standard
• Added transfer enable parameter to all limiter and protection
blocks
• Corrected failure of DIGIN_IN1_FB and DIGIN)IN2_FB block
outputs to update
• Corrected field voltage perturbation caused by missing B-phase
SCR firing pulses
1.02.02, Dec-14 • Corrected Modbus communication errors
• Added vector block SWITCH6F to address phase shift
measurement issues

ECM-2 Revision History


iv 9411300990 Rev D

BESTCOMS™Pro Software
Version and Date Change
1.01.03, Oct-11 • Initial release
2.00.01, Mar-13 • Bridge status screens added
• Data recording setup consolidated onto two screens
• Units information added to the control panel and metering
screens
• Help menu item added to metering screens for access to
information about blocks associated with the metered
parameters
• Help button added to “Assign Input” dialog displayed when a
block input assignment is changed
2.00.02, Aug-13 • Updated ECM-2 LOS2_SENS help file
• Expanded password access to reset certain alarm conditions
• Corrected various setting and menu display issues
• Corrected minor file handling issues
2.00.03, Feb-14 • Prevented downloading of data from a function block while the
block is running
• Expanded the Control Panel screen to display setting pre-
position status and both actual and per unit values
• Added upper and lower limit indicators to the Limiter screen
2.00.04, Aug-14 • Corrected scrolling behavior of metering and reports screens in
the View Explorer
• Various improvements in data and settings display
2.00.05, Dec-14 • Corrected display behavior of large values in the Assignment
Editor
• Adjusted data refresh behavior of Block setting screen
• Improved compatibility with configuration files created with
various firmware versions
• Corrected communication behavior with FCIM
2.01.00, Nov-16 • Added Windows® 10 compatibility
• Added BCM-2 support

Manual
Revision and Date Change
A, Dec-11 • Initial release
B, Apr-12 • Moved Logic Blocks into separate manual (9411300991)
• Converted manual to latest style
• Minor text edits in Introduction
• Replaced Figures 7, 8, and 9. (Added ™ to BESTCOMS™Pro)
C, Mar-13 • Revised the minimum PC recommendations (Table 3) for
BESTCOMS™Pro
• Updated Figure 7, Figure 20, and Table 14 to reflect new
BESTCOMS™Pro toolbar icon (close button)
• Added caution box addressing the suitability of Auto Tuning PID
values in the Commissioning chapter
• In BESTCOMS™Pro chapter, Data Monitoring descriptions and
illustrations were updated to reflect consolidation of settings
into two screen views.
• Replaced workspace material with discussion of BESTspace™

Revision History ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D v

Manual
Revision and Date Change
• Revised Updating BESTCOMS™Pro to cover manual and
automatic updating of the software
• Added bridge status screens and descriptions to
BESTCOMS™Pro chapter
• Updated “Monitor View” illustrations in BESTCOMS™Pro
D, Feb-17 • Added caution statement about nonvolatile memory
• Corrected relay output contact specifications
• Added procedure for manual installation of the USB driver
• Updated the CE compliance statement
• Added an NIIPT compliance statement

ECM-2 Revision History


vi 9411300990 Rev D

Revision History ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D vii

Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Indicators and Interfaces............................................................................................................................ 3
Indicators ................................................................................................................................................... 4
+24V Power ........................................................................................................................................... 4
Operating State ...................................................................................................................................... 4
Firing Enabled ........................................................................................................................................ 4
System Alarm......................................................................................................................................... 4
Bridge Alarm .......................................................................................................................................... 4
Bridge Link Loss .................................................................................................................................... 4
Relay Out 1, 2, 3, and 4 ......................................................................................................................... 4
Contact Input 1, 2, 3, and 4 ................................................................................................................... 4
Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................. 4
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................... 5
USB Connectors .................................................................................................................................... 5
RS-485 Connectors ............................................................................................................................... 5
Ethernet Connectors .............................................................................................................................. 5
RS-232 Connector ................................................................................................................................. 5
Functional Description ............................................................................................................................... 7
Sensor Inputs ............................................................................................................................................ 8
Excitation Control ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Regulation .............................................................................................................................................. 8
Limiters .................................................................................................................................................. 9
Regulation Mode Selection (PID Controller) ........................................................................................ 10
Excitation System Stabilizer (“Damping”) ............................................................................................ 10
Transient Gain Reduction (TGR) ......................................................................................................... 11
Adjuster Followers (Setpoint Tracking) ................................................................................................ 11
Balance Meter Driver ........................................................................................................................... 11
Power System Stabilizer (PSS) ........................................................................................................... 11
Protection Functions ............................................................................................................................ 11
Field Temperature Monitor .................................................................................................................. 11
Data Logger ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Event Recorder .................................................................................................................................... 12
Sequence of Events Logging ............................................................................................................... 12
Power Bridge Firing Interface .................................................................................................................. 12
Mounting .................................................................................................................................................... 13
Terminals and Connections ..................................................................................................................... 15
Screw-Terminal Connectors .................................................................................................................... 16
Analog Inputs ....................................................................................................................................... 16
Power Supply Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 16
Relay Outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 16
Contact Inputs ...................................................................................................................................... 16
Analog Outputs .................................................................................................................................... 18
IRIG Input ............................................................................................................................................. 18
Fiber Optic Connectors............................................................................................................................ 18
Analog I/O Module Connections .......................................................................................................... 18
Digital I/O Module Connections ........................................................................................................... 19
Isolation Transducer Connections ....................................................................................................... 19
Power Bridge Connections .................................................................................................................. 19
BESTCOMS™Pro Software ...................................................................................................................... 21
Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 21
System Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 21
Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 22
Running BESTCOMS™Pro ................................................................................................................. 22
ECM-2 Contents
viii 9411300990 Rev D

Activation Key ...................................................................................................................................... 23


Connecting to an Excitation Control Module (ECM-2) ............................................................................ 24
Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................... 24
COM Port ............................................................................................................................................. 26
USB ...................................................................................................................................................... 26
Manual USB Driver Installation ............................................................................................................ 27
Connecting to a BCM .............................................................................................................................. 27
Overview of Functions ............................................................................................................................. 28
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Set State Icon ...................................................................................................................................... 29
Configuration Window ............................................................................................................................. 29
Window Docking ...................................................................................................................................... 29
Programmable Logic ............................................................................................................................... 30
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 30
Easy Screens ....................................................................................................................................... 31
Controller States .................................................................................................................................. 31
Programming a Controller .................................................................................................................... 32
Data Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................... 34
Data Logger ......................................................................................................................................... 34
Event Recorders .................................................................................................................................. 35
View Explorer .......................................................................................................................................... 43
View Explorer Windows ........................................................................................................................... 43
Indicators ............................................................................................................................................. 44
Diagram View....................................................................................................................................... 45
Execution View .................................................................................................................................... 53
Application Configuration View ............................................................................................................ 54
Mainline Execution View (BCM only) ................................................................................................... 57
Memory View ....................................................................................................................................... 57
Monitor View ........................................................................................................................................ 58
Real-Time Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 58
Metering ............................................................................................................................................... 62
Commissioning .................................................................................................................................... 70
Reports ................................................................................................................................................ 79
Settings Explorer ..................................................................................................................................... 82
Settings Explorer Windows ..................................................................................................................... 83
Controller Settings ............................................................................................................................... 83
Device Security Settings ...................................................................................................................... 85
Monitor View Setup .............................................................................................................................. 86
Data Recording Setup ......................................................................................................................... 86
Block Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 87
PSS ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
Alarms Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 91
Menu and Toolbar Commands ................................................................................................................ 92
Security Levels ........................................................................................................................................ 95
Setting Security Level Passwords ....................................................................................................... 95
Changing Security Levels .................................................................................................................... 95
Logic Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 96
Logic Block ........................................................................................................................................... 96
Logic Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 96
Data Loggers and Event Recorders ........................................................................................................ 97
Data Logger ......................................................................................................................................... 97
Event Recorder .................................................................................................................................... 97
Alarms...................................................................................................................................................... 98
Alarm Notifications ............................................................................................................................... 98
Viewing Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 99
Alarms Configuration Window ............................................................................................................. 99
Event and Alarm History Recorder (Sequence of Events) .................................................................. 99
BESTspace™ ........................................................................................................................................... 99

Contents ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D ix

BESTCOMS™Pro Updates ...................................................................................................................... 99


Firmware Upgrades ............................................................................................................................... 100
Plug-Ins for BESTCOMS™Pro .............................................................................................................. 101
Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................... 103
Safety..................................................................................................................................................... 103
Test Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 103
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 104
Procedures Outline ................................................................................................................................ 104
Machine Idle ....................................................................................................................................... 104
Machine Running at Rated Speed, Generator Breaker Open ........................................................... 104
Machine Running at Rated Speed, Generator Breaker Closed ........................................................ 104
Commissioning Procedures .................................................................................................................. 105
Preparation ........................................................................................................................................ 105
External Wiring................................................................................................................................... 105
Auxiliary Power Circuits ..................................................................................................................... 105
Power Source Phasing ...................................................................................................................... 105
Firmware Verification ......................................................................................................................... 106
Transducer Scale and Offset ............................................................................................................. 106
Relays, Breakers, and Control Switches ........................................................................................... 109
Firing Control and Power Bridges—Generator Not Spinning ............................................................ 110
Adjusters, Followers, Regulators, & Controllers—Generator Not Spinning ...................................... 112
Limiters and Protective Functions ...................................................................................................... 114
Loss of Sensing and Other Limiter and Protection Settings .............................................................. 116
Monitoring Functions.......................................................................................................................... 116
Reconnection to PPT or PMG ........................................................................................................... 117
Offline Excitation Control ................................................................................................................... 118
Offline Stability and Damping ............................................................................................................ 120
Machine PT and CT Signal Polarity and Phase Angle ...................................................................... 121
Var/Power Factor Control .................................................................................................................. 121
Power System Stabilizer .................................................................................................................... 122
Limiters .............................................................................................................................................. 122
Final Check of System Operation ...................................................................................................... 122
Module Setup Summary ........................................................................................................................ 123
Auto Tuning ........................................................................................................................................... 123
Auto Tune Screen Functions ............................................................................................................. 126
AUTOTUNE Logic Inputs/Outputs ..................................................................................................... 126
Modbus™ Communication...................................................................................................................... 129
Controller #1 Modbus® Coil Map............................................................................................................ 129
Controller #1 Modbus™ Holding Registers ........................................................................................... 138
Controller #2 Modbus™ Coil Map ......................................................................................................... 147
Controller #2 Modbus™ Holding Registers ........................................................................................... 182
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 191
Backup Battery ...................................................................................................................................... 191
Specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 193
Operating Power (2 Inputs) ................................................................................................................... 193
Analog Inputs (24) ................................................................................................................................. 193
Analog Outputs (2) ................................................................................................................................ 193
Analog Voltage Output ....................................................................................................................... 193
Analog Current Output ....................................................................................................................... 193
Input Contacts (4) .................................................................................................................................. 193
Output Contacts (4) ............................................................................................................................... 193
Carry Ratings (Resistive) ................................................................................................................... 193
Make and Break Ratings (Resistive) ................................................................................................. 193
Regulation ............................................................................................................................................. 193
Accuracy and Stability ....................................................................................................................... 193
Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)................................................................................................. 194

ECM-2 Contents
x 9411300990 Rev D

AVR with Reactive Current Compensation ........................................................................................ 194


Manual Regulation ............................................................................................................................. 194
Var Control Regulation ...................................................................................................................... 194
PF Regulation .................................................................................................................................... 194
Setpoint Traverse Rate.......................................................................................................................... 194
Limiters .................................................................................................................................................. 194
Minimum Excitation ............................................................................................................................ 194
Overexcitation .................................................................................................................................... 195
Volts per Hertz ................................................................................................................................... 195
Overvoltage ........................................................................................................................................ 195
Undervoltage...................................................................................................................................... 195
Minimum Field Excitation ................................................................................................................... 195
Instantaneous Overcurrent ................................................................................................................ 195
Var ..................................................................................................................................................... 195
Generator Line Current ...................................................................................................................... 195
Protection Functions .............................................................................................................................. 196
Minimum Excitation ............................................................................................................................ 196
Overexcitation .................................................................................................................................... 196
Volts per Hertz ................................................................................................................................... 196
Overvoltage ........................................................................................................................................ 196
Undervoltage...................................................................................................................................... 196
Minimum Field Excitation ................................................................................................................... 196
Instantaneous Overcurrent ................................................................................................................ 196
Var ..................................................................................................................................................... 196
Generator Line Current ...................................................................................................................... 196
Alarm Indication ..................................................................................................................................... 196
Generator Field Temperature Monitor ............................................................................................... 196
Exciter Field Temperature Monitor .................................................................................................... 197
Data Logger ........................................................................................................................................... 197
Event Recorder ...................................................................................................................................... 197
Sequence of Events Recording ............................................................................................................. 197
Metering Accuracy ................................................................................................................................. 197
Communication Interface....................................................................................................................... 197
USB Ports (2) ..................................................................................................................................... 197
Ethernet Ports (2)............................................................................................................................... 198
RS-485 Ports (3) ................................................................................................................................ 198
RS-232 Port (1) .................................................................................................................................. 198
Backup Battery for Real-Time Clock ..................................................................................................... 198
Environment .......................................................................................................................................... 198
Operating and Storage Temperature ................................................................................................. 198
Humidity ............................................................................................................................................. 198
Altitude ............................................................................................................................................... 199
Agency Certifications ............................................................................................................................. 199
CE Compliance .................................................................................................................................. 199
NIIPT .................................................................................................................................................. 199
Patents .................................................................................................................................................. 199
Physical ................................................................................................................................................. 199

Contents ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 1

Introduction
The ECM-2 Excitation Control Module provides the core functions of regulation, input sensing, and
thyristor firing control in a DECS-2100 Digital Excitation Control System. Functions previously provided by
three separate circuit boards in ECS2100 systems are now provided by one compact module. The ECM-2
replaces the Sensor Input Module (SIM), Exciter Control Module (ECM), and Firing Control Interface
Module (FCIM) previously used in ECS2100 systems. ECM-2 advantages include:
• Fully-enclosed package provides protection of key system circuitry
• Previously-required space for three, separate circuit boards is reduced to one compact module
• The proven reliability of the ECS2100 system design with added functionality:
o Improved thyristor firing accuracy
o Increased number of analog inputs from 12 to 24
o Standard ECM-2 hardware configuration supports up to four power bridges via fiber optic
communications. The expanded fiber optic version can accommodate up to 16 power bridges
o Expanded event recording and data logging capability
o Additional USB port accepts removable storage media for downloading events, data logs,
and alarm logs without the use of a computer
o Cross-current compensation between excitation systems through a built-in communication via
RJ-45 port over Ethernet
o IRIG-B and NTP time synchronization provides synchronized data recording.
o Additional RJ-45, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet port for a dedicated control network
protocol

ECM-2 0BIntroduction
2 9411300990 Rev D

0BIntroduction ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 3

Indicators and Interfaces

Excitation
Control Relay +24V System
Out 1 Power Alarm
Module
Relay Operating Bridge
Out 2 State Alarm ECM-2
Relay Firing Bridge
Out 3 Enabled Link Loss

Relay
Out 4

Contact
Input 1

Contact
Input 2

Contact
Input 3

Contact
Input 4

Ethernet
1 2
Data RS-232
USB 1

Link
P0066-02

RS-485 Ethernet IRIG


1 2 3 1 2 USB 2 In Gnd

Figure 1. ECM-2 Indicators and Interfaces

ECM-2 0BIndicators and Interfaces


4 9411300990 Rev D

Indicators
LED indicators, located on the front panel, provide the status of ECM-2 functions.

+24V Power
This green indicator lights to indicate the presence of ECM-2 operating power at either of the ECM-2
power supply inputs (PS1 or PS2).

Operating State
This green indicator annunciates the three operating states of ECM-2 operating code.
When the function block logic within the user’s application program is not being executed by the ECM-2
firmware, this indicator is unlit.
A flashing indicator annunciates that execution of the logic within the user’s application program is
occurring but the DECS-2100 system is offline (41A, breaker open).
Execution of application logic in an online (41A, breaker closed) DECS-2100 system is annunciated by a
steadily-lit indicator.

Firing Enabled
This green indicator lights when the ECM-2 module is supplying power bridge SCR firing commands to
the DECS-2100 system’s Bridge Control Module (BCM).

System Alarm
This red indicator lights when a system alarm exists within the ECM-2 module.

Bridge Alarm
This red indicator lights when a power bridge problem or failure is detected by the Bridge Control Module
(BCM) and communicated to the ECM-2 module.

Bridge Link Loss


This red indicator lights to indicate a loss of the fiber-optic signals between the ECM-2 module and the
Bridge Control Module (BCM).

Relay Out 1, 2, 3, and 4


Four amber indicators annunciate the energized/de-energized status of the four programmable relay
outputs. A lit indicator annunciates that the corresponding relay is energized.

Contact Input 1, 2, 3, and 4


Four amber indicators annunciate the open/closed status of the four externally-wetted programmable
contact inputs.

Ethernet
Two sets of indicators show the status of the two Ethernet communication ports. The green Link
indicators light to indicate that the corresponding Ethernet port connection is active/enabled. The amber
Data indicators light when the ECM-2 module is transmitting or receiving data over an Ethernet network.

0BIndicators and Interfaces ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 5

Interfaces
Interfaces provide communication between the ECM-2 and other system devices.

USB Connectors
Two USB connectors are located on the front panel. An A-type, USB connector, designated USB 2,
connects with a USB flash drive for the downloading of DECS-2100 event records, data log, and alarm
log. A B-type USB connector, designated USB 1, mates with a standard USB cable and is used for
communication between the DECS-2100 system and a PC operating BESTCOMS™Pro.

RS-485 Connectors
Three eight-pin, RJ-45 jacks, located on the lower side of the ECM-2 module, enable communication with
distributed control, SCADA systems, or other operator interface devices via Modbus™ RTU. The RS-485
connectors are identified with the numbers 1, 2, and 3.

Ethernet Connectors
Two eight-pin, RJ-45 jacks, located on the lower side of the ECM-2 module, are intended for local area
network (LAN) communication (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX). Typically, one jack is used for communication
with the DECS-2100 display panel. In a typical DECS-2100 system, the user will not plug directly into
these Ethernet ports. Instead, these Ethernet ports will be connected to an Ethernet switch which will
accept any of the Ethernet connection required by the user. The Ethernet connectors are identified with
the numbers 1 and 2 and have separate MAC addresses.

RS-232 Connector
A nine-pin, D-sub connector, located on the front panel, enables communication with the ECM-2 and
Bridge Control Modules through a PC operating BESTCOMSPro software.

ECM-2 0BIndicators and Interfaces


6 9411300990 Rev D

0BIndicators and Interfaces ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 7

Functional Description
ECM-2 performs functions previously performed in ECS2100 systems by three, separate modules:
Sensor Input Module (SIM), Exciter Control Module (ECM), and Firing Control Interface Module (FCIM).
The functionality of these modules has been retained with some enhancements. ECM-2 functions are
illustrated in the block diagram of Figure 2.
A
F+

3-Phase AC Synchronous B
Power Source Generator/Motor
(Shunt fed or
PMG)
F-

Bridge/Cabinet
Shunt
Isolation
Transducer
Card

Bridge
Bridge
Control
Bridge
Control
Module
Control
Module
0-15
Modules
0-15
0-15

RX TX PT Card CT Card
A
B
Isolation
C
Transducer
Rectifier Bridges 0-15
Card

Fiber Cables Fiber Cables Fiber Cables


VAB VBC Bridge 0..15 If Vf
PPT Gen Field
Analog Inputs
FPGA
Set and Send firing command Analog Input Scaling
Send/Receive fiber communications
Alpha, Theta, Omega
Power Input ECM-2 Sensing PLL
VCO count value
PLL generator voltage in pu
Firing
Vab & Vbc Reference AUTO_MXR AUTO_REG
Error
Scaling for field V Power Input Signal Reference
& I and power input PID S S OR Gate
Adjustment

Limiters, PSS, Etc. Ethernet 2


Power Inputs RS232
USB1
PS1 PS2
Contact Iputs 1 - 4 Relay Outputs 1 - 4 Analog Outputs 1 and 2 + - + - Ethernet 1 RS485 (x3)
P0066-16

+24V +24V
HMI PC
Supply Supply

Figure 2. ECM-2 Function Blocks

ECM-2 0BFunctional Description


8 9411300990 Rev D

Sensor Inputs
Twenty-four, high-speed analog inputs (channels) collect data (sensing values) from the generator PTs
and CTs and other analog signal sources through hard-wired inputs. Fiber-optic connections receive
digital signals supplied by the DECS-2100 system Digital I/O Modules. Analog and temperature signals
supplied by the DECS-2100 system Analog I/O Modules are also received through fiber-optic connections
on the isolation transducer card interface. Analog inputs are digitized and provided to the excitation
circuitry for interpretation.

Excitation Control
The excitation control portion of the ECM-2 module provides the primary control for the DECS-2100
system and consists of logic for excitation control, limiting, protection, and communication.

Regulation
Regulation modes are described in the following paragraphs.

Manual Regulation
This function provides closed-loop regulation of field current (or during system testing, field voltage).
Manual regulation mode is typically the default control mode used when the PT signal is lost.
When operating in manual regulation mode, the ECM-2 maintains the field current level to within ±0.5% of
the setpoint throughout the entire load range of the generator. The field current regulation setpoint is
adjustable over the range of 1 or 5% of no-load field current to 125% of rated load current.

Automatic Regulation
This function provides closed-loop regulation of the generator terminal voltage and is derived from the
regulator PTs. In the event of a regulator PT failure, it can be derived from the metering PTs.
When operating in automatic regulation mode, the steady-state generator terminal voltage is held to
within ±0.2% over the entire load range. The voltage adjustment range is 40 to 120% of the rated terminal
voltage. Regulation occurs for generator frequencies over the range of 20 to 180 hertz.
Several types of generator current compensation can be provided as auxiliary signals to the automatic
regulation function. Reactive droop and line drop compensation use a processed CT input to modify the
operating point value based upon the magnitude of the reactive portion of the line current. Cross-current
compensation uses an additional CT input from another generator or data exchanged via an Ethernet link
to provide for reactive current sharing of paralleled generators.

Var Regulation/Control
This function compares the calculated var level of the generator output to an internal reference (var
adjuster) value. The difference between the two values is multiplied by a gain and then used for var
control or var regulation.
For var control, if a condition exists where the var error is outside the acceptable window for the duration
of the preset time delay, the var controller acts to control the voltage regulator to keep the var level near
the prescribed value. If a condition exists where the var error is outside the acceptable window for less
than the duration of the preset time delay (such as, during transients), the system continues to function
like a voltage regulator.
Var regulation is sometimes utilized in industrial applications where the generator is providing local power
factor correction in addition to real power (watts). In this application the var error substitutes for the ac
voltage error. Proper adjustment of parameters is critical for stable operation in this application.
A var adjuster function provides the means for varying the generator var output by varying the internal
references applied to the digital var regulator error function.

0BFunctional Description ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 9

Power Factor Regulation/Control


This function compares the calculated generator power factor value to an internal reference (PF adjuster).
The difference between the two values is multiplied by a gain and then used for power factor control or
power factor regulation.
Power factor control operates in a similar manner to var control.
Power factor regulation operates in a similar manner to var regulation. Power factor regulation, like var
regulation, is sometimes utilized in industrial applications where the generator is providing local power
factor correction in addition to real power (watts). In this application, the power factor error substitutes for
the ac voltage error. Proper adjustment of parameters is critical for stable operation in this application.
Note also that the power factor error is not nearly as sensitive to var output as the var error at unity power
factor. At unity power factor a 1% bandwidth in power factor (0.99 lag to 0.99 lead) corresponds to a var
bandwidth of 14% (±0.14 per unit of generator rating). The power factor to var relationship is also highly
nonlinear. For this reason, power factor regulation is not normally a recommended mode of operation.
A power factor adjuster function provides the means for varying the generator power factor output by
varying the internal references applied to the digital power factor regulator error function.

Limiters
Limiting functions are described in the following paragraphs. Dual setpoints/gain groups are available.

Minimum Excitation Limiter (MEL)


The MEL maintains machine excitation above a predetermined MVA characteristic and thus prevents the
machine from reaching underexcited conditions that could endanger synchronism with the power system.
The inputs to this limiter are taken from the CT and PT signals, and the resultant operating point is
compared to an approximated steady-state stability limit curve. The MEL function sends an output that is
proportional to the distance from the limiter curve and the operating point. The MEL output is
auctioneered against the ac error signal to prevent excitation from decreasing below the desired level.
This function operates in the same manner as traditional analog systems in that the limiter curve is based
upon assuming it is a steady-state stability limit, and as such, is recalibrated based upon the square of
the system voltage.

Underexcitation Limiter (UEL)


The UEL is nearly identical to the MEL (minimum excitation limiter). However, it is capable of recalibration
of the limit curve based upon the stator temperature or the hydrogen cooling gas pressure. Thus, it is
used for limiting of underexcited conditions based upon the generator capability. The inputs to this limiter
are also taken from the CT and PT signals. The resultant operating point is compared to the limit curve.
The UEL function sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the limiter curve and the
operating point. The UEL output is auctioneered against the ac error signal to prevent excitation from
decreasing below the desired level.

Overexcitation Limiter (OEL)


This function limits the magnitude and duration of excessive current and voltage applied to the exciter or
machine field. The limiter returns excitation to a preset level after an adjustable time delay. The limiter
operates on an inverse time characteristic, permitting lower values of overexcitation for longer time
periods and cutting off higher values of overexcitation in shorter time intervals. The OEL function also has
cool-down modeling that provides a “memory” of the heating effects of excessive overcurrent. The OEL
function sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the limiter curve and the operating point.
The OEL output is auctioneered against the ac error signal to prevent excitation from increasing above
the desired level.

Volts per Hertz Limiter


This limiter protects the generator from excessive volts per hertz operating conditions. This could result
from system frequency dropping below normal or from system conditions causing overvoltage at nominal
frequency. Excessive volts per hertz can cause overheating of the machine and unit transformer. This
limiter has an inverse time characteristic that can be reduced when offline to prevent excessive volts per
hertz during coast-down of a unit for circumstances where the excitation system remains energized. The
ECM-2 0BFunctional Description
10 9411300990 Rev D

Volts per Hertz Limiter function sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the limiter curve
and the operating point. The Volts per Hertz Limiter output is auctioneered against the ac error signal to
prevent volts per hertz increasing above the desired level.

Overvoltage Limiter
The overvoltage limiter protects the generator from sustained, high levels of terminal voltage. High
terminal voltage can occur due to either full-load rejection (on a large hydro unit) or a failure within the
excitation system. The Overvoltage Limiter function sends an output that is proportional to the distance
from the limiter curve and the operating point. The Overvoltage Limiter output is auctioneered against the
ac error signal to prevent voltage from increasing above the desired level.

Undervoltage Limiter
The undervoltage limiter protects the generator from sustained, low levels of terminal voltage. Low
terminal voltage can occur due to a failure within the excitation system. The Undervoltage Limiter function
sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the limiter curve and the operating point. The
Undervoltage Limiter output is auctioneered against the ac error signal to prevent voltage from
decreasing below the desired level.

Minimum Field Excitation Limiter (MFEL)


The MFEL maintains the generator field current or voltage at a user-adjustable level. The MFEL function
sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the limiter curve and the operating point. The
MFEL output is auctioneered against the ac error signal to prevent field excitation from decreasing below
the desired level.

Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiter


This limiter prevents the excitation system from producing high output currents in excess of any useful
level, such as could occur if a turn-to-turn short appears in the field. As the name implies, there is no
intentional time delay in actuation of this limiting function. The Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiter function
sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the limiter curve and the operating point. The
Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiter output is auctioneered against the ac error signal to prevent current
from increasing above the desired level.

Var Limiter
The var limiter protects the generator from sustained, high levels of vars. High var levels can occur due to
a failure within the excitation system. A user-defined setpoint limits the maximum var flow. The Var Limiter
function sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the limiter curve and the operating point.
The Var Limiter output is auctioneered against the ac error signal to prevent the var level from increasing
above the desired level.

Generator Line Current Limiter


The generator line current limiter lowers the field current during overexcitation and raises the field current
during underexcitation. The limiter operates after the field current exceeds the user-defined pickup level.
The Generator Line Current Limiter function sends an output that is proportional to the distance from the
limiter curve and the operating point. The Generator Line Current Limiter output is auctioneered against
the ac error signal to prevent generator line current from increasing above below the desired level.

Regulation Mode Selection (PID Controller)


This function provides the means to utilize proportional, integral, and derivative closed-loop control of the
generator terminal voltage. Dual gain settings are available. Separate gain settings are available when
operating in manual mode.

Excitation System Stabilizer (“Damping”)


Damping compensates for the inherent, long time delay associated with the response of the generator
and exciter fields of brushless or rotating exciter systems. The excitation control system is stabilized by

0BFunctional Description ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 11

applying a negative feedback to the ac error and limiter functions. This feedback signal is derived from
either the generator or exciter field current (or voltage) rate of change and scaled by a gain factor.

Transient Gain Reduction (TGR)


TGR is usually applied only to static excitation control systems. It is normally used for improving system
stability by providing separately defined time constants for the various limiters and error detectors.

Adjuster Followers (Setpoint Tracking)


The adjuster follower functions provide for a “bumpless” transfer of the digital regulator from ac voltage
regulation to dc field current regulation and vice versa.
In field current regulation mode, the follower in the ac adjuster is enabled. It senses the ac error signal,
changes the setpoint of the ac error signal, and changes the setpoint of the ac adjuster to keep the error
within a preset bandwidth.
In the ac voltage regulation mode, the follower in the digital dc adjuster is enabled. It senses the dc error
signal and changes the setpoint of the digital dc adjuster to keep the error within a preset bandwidth.

Balance Meter Driver


This driver provides a signal for a balance meter. Use of a balance meter helps the operator ensure that a
transfer from manual to auto mode is bumpless.

Power System Stabilizer (PSS)


The optional PSS feature damps oscillations that may occur due to voltage regulators swinging against
the balance of the power system. The PSS function may be configured to incorporate the IEEE dual-input
model, which can accommodate both an instantaneous electrical power signal and either a frequency or
speed input signal.

Protection Functions
The excitation control portion of the ECM-2 module can be programmed to provide the following
protective functions:
• Over/Undervoltage
• Volts per Hertz
• Overexcitation
• Loss of Field Underexcitation
• Loss of Sensing
• Phase Unbalance
• Field Ground
The protection pickup setting in the ECM-2 must be coordinated with any additional, external backup
protective relays that may be utilized.

Field Temperature Monitor


The exciter and/or generator field temperature can be accurately calculated and displayed with this
function. Temperature is calculated based upon the known field resistance at a known temperature
(usually 25°C). The measured resistance is obtained by dividing the measured field voltage by the
measured field current. The temperature is then determined based upon the temperature coefficient of
the winding material (usually copper).

Data Logger
A time- and date-stamped group of 12 user-selectable parameters also serves as a continuous data
logger function. Up to 100,000 points (shared equally with up to 12 selected parameters can be recorded.
ECM-2 data logger functions are configured in BESTCOMS™Pro.

ECM-2 0BFunctional Description


12 9411300990 Rev D

Event Recorder
Four configurable event recorder blocks are capable of capturing up to eight input event records per
recorder block. There are 100,000 points of data dedicated to each recorder block. Data point collection
intervals can be as short as one millisecond. ECM-2 event recorder functions are configured in
BESTCOMSPro.

Sequence of Events Logging


A time- and date-stamped list of up to 16,000 internal and user-defined variables are logged. User-
defined variables are selected in BESTCOMSPro.

Power Bridge Firing Interface


This portion of the ECM-2 module provides SCR firing commands to the DECS-2100 system Bridge
Control Modules. In turn, each Bridge Control Module controls the level of dc output power supplied by
the corresponding power bridge. Power bridge output is determined by a control signal supplied from the
excitation control circuitry to the firing control logic. To generate the SCR firing signals, the firing control
circuitry creates timing signals that are time- and pattern-synchronized with the monitored, three-phase
PPT voltage. (The PPT voltage is monitored by way of an Isolation Transducer connected to the ECM-2
module’s PPT fiber-optic input.) The firing signals, interspersed with data signals, are transmitted to the
DECS-2100 system Bridge Control Modules via fiber-optic connections.
In its standard configuration, the ECM-2 module can control from one to four sets of Bridge Control
Modules and power bridges. In its optional configuration, up to 16 sets of Bridge Control Modules and
power bridges can be controlled.
In addition to power bridge control, this circuitry processes power bridge alarms received from the Bridge
Control Modules and provides the alarm data to the excitation control logic. Processed alarms include
SCR loss, high power bridge temperature, and low power bridge temperature.

0BFunctional Description ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 13

Mounting
ECM-2 circuitry is housed in a metal enclosure with a footprint of 14 by 9 inches (36 by 23 centimeters).
Enclosure dimensions are illustrated in Figure 3.

Figure 3. ECM-2 Outline Dimensions

ECM-2 0BMounting
14 9411300990 Rev D

0BMounting ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 15

Terminals and Connections


ECM-2 connections are made on the left, right, and lower sides of the module and use the following
connector types. ECM-2 terminal connections are shown in Figure 4. The following paragraphs describe
the physical aspects of the ECM-2 module.

Excitation
Control Relay +24V System

F48
RX
Out 1 Power Alarm
1
Ch1

Module

F47
TX
PS1

Relay Operating Bridge


Ch2

Out 2 State Alarm ECM-2

F46
RX
Ch3

Relay Firing Bridge


PS2

Out 3 Enabled Link Loss

F45
TX
Ch4

Relay
Out 4

F44
RX
Ch5

F43
NC COM NO

Contact

TX
Ch6

Input 1
Out1

Analog Inputs

F42
Contact

RX
Ch7

Input 2
NC COM NO

F41
TX
Out2

Ch8

Contact
Input 3

F40
Ch9

RX
NC COM NO

Contact
Out3

F39
TX
Input 4
Ch10
NC COM NO

Ch11 Ch12

F38
RX
Out4

F37
TX
24
In1

Ch13 Ch14 Ch15


25

F36
RX
F35
TX
In2

F34
RX
F33
TX
In3

Ch16 Ch17 Ch18

F32
RX
In4

F31
TX
Analog Inputs
Ch19 Ch20 Ch21

F30
RX
F29
TX

Ethernet
1 2
Out1

Data
F28
RX

RS-232
USB 1
Ch22

F27
TX
Out2

Link
Ch23 Ch24

F26
RX

RS-485 Ethernet IRIG


F25
TX

1 2 3 1 2 In Gnd
48

USB 2

P0064-76
Figure 4. ECM-2 Terminal Connections

ECM-2 0BTerminals and Connections


16 9411300990 Rev D

Screw-Terminal Connectors
Connections on the left side and bottom of the module use connectors with screw-down, compression
terminals. The connectors, and the headers that they plug into, have a dovetailed edge that ensures
proper connector orientation. Similar-sized connectors and headers are uniquely keyed to ensure that a
connector mates only with the correct header to prevent damage to the ECM-2. However, care must still
be taken to ensure that the proper connector is inserted into the appropriate header. Connector screw
terminals accept a maximum wire size of 12 AWG or 2.5 mm2. The maximum screw torque is 5 in-lb or
0.6 N•m. Screw terminal connectors are used for the analog inputs, power supply inputs, relay outputs,
contact inputs, analog outputs, and the IRIG input.

Analog Inputs
The ECM-2 module has 24 analog inputs (channels) available to receive generator PT and CT metering
signals as well as other analog signals. Each of the 24 high-speed inputs is differential and accepts a 40
Vac rms signal (+57 or –57 Vdc peak). Inputs are sampled simultaneously every 64 microseconds and
averaged every 512 microseconds for an 8-sample average. Analog inputs are identified by channel
numbers: Ch1 through Ch24. Analog input terminal assignments are listed in Table 1.
Table 1. ECM-2 Analog Input Terminal Assignments
Channel Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7 Ch8 Ch9 Ch10 Ch11 Ch12
1 (–) 3 (–) 5 (–) 7 (–) 9 (–) 11 (–) 13 (–) 15 (–) 17 (–) 19 (–) 21 (–) 23 (–)
Terminals
2 (+) 4 (+) 6 (+) 8 (+) 10 (+) 12 (+) 14 (+) 16 (+) 18 (+) 20 (+) 22 (+) 24 (+)

Channel Ch13 Ch14 Ch15 Ch16 Ch17 Ch18 Ch19 Ch20 Ch21 Ch22 Ch23 Ch24
25 (–) 27 (–) 29 (–) 31 (–) 33 (–) 35 (–) 37 (–) 39 (–) 41 (–) 43 (–) 45 (–) 47 (–)
Terminals
26 (+) 28 (+) 30 (+) 32 (+) 34 (+) 36 (+) 38 (+) 40 (+) 42 (+) 44 (+) 46 (+) 48 (+)

Power Supply Inputs


Two power supply inputs accept 24 Vdc operating power from two separate sources for failsafe operation.
(One 24 Vdc power source applied to one of the power supply inputs is sufficient for ECM-2 operation.
Only one should be energized at a time.) Each power supply input has an operating range of 16.8 to 36
Vdc. Internal holdup circuitry maintains ECM-2 operation through power interruptions as long as 200
milliseconds. The power supply inputs are designated PS1 and PS2. PS1 terminal assignments are 49
(+), 50 (–), and 51 (chassis ground). PS2 terminal assignments are 52 (+), 53 (–), and 54 (chassis
ground).

Relay Outputs
Four SPDT relay outputs are available for annunciation of user-defined conditions. Relay outputs are
configured to annunciate the desired conditions in BESTCOMS™Pro. Relay output ratings are listed in the
Specifications chapter. The relay outputs are designated Out 1, Out 2, Out 3, and Out 4. Out 1 terminal
assignments are 55 (NC), 56 (COM), and 57 (NO). Out 2 terminal assignments are 58 (NC), 59 (COM),
and 60 (NO). Out 3 terminal assignments are 61 (NC), 62 (COM), and 63 (NC). Out 4 terminal
assignments are 64 (NC), 65 (COM), and 66 (NO).

Contact Inputs
Four sets of terminals accept wetted contact inputs from external switches or other system devices.
Contact inputs can be individually configured within BESTCOMSPro to trigger ECM-2 responses to the
inputs. Contact inputs are designated In1, In2, In3, and In4. In1 terminal assignments are 67 (+) and
68 (–), In2 terminal assignments are 69 (+) and 70 (–), In3 terminal assignments are 71 (+) and 72 (–),
and In4 terminal assignments are 73 (+) and 74 (–).
The interrogation voltage for each contact input is switch-selectable and set at the factory for 24 Vdc or
125 Vdc/120 Vac depending on the DECS-2100 system configuration. If the ECM-2 is supplied as a
stand-alone or replacement unit, the switches should be set according to your system. The switches are
accessed just above the In1, In2, In3, and In4 connectors on the left side of the unit. See Figure 5.
0BTerminals and Connections ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 17

Caution
Ensure that the unit is de-energized before attempting to set the
contact input switches. A thin non-conductive rod should be used to
set the switches.

Figure 5. Contact Input Switch Locations (Left-Side View of ECM-2 with Cover On)

Alternately, removing the unit cover provides access to the contact input switches. The following
paragraphs describe how to remove the unit cover and adjust the contact input switches.

Caution
Ensure that the unit is de-energized. Observe all electrostatic
discharge (ESD) precautions when handing the ECM-2.

1. De-energize the ECM-2 and the system. Remove all connections to the ECM-2.
2. Remove the six cover screws (located on the left- and right-hand side of the ECM-2) and carefully
remove the cover.
3. Locate the contact input switches and set according to your system. See Figure 6.
4. Reattach the cover using the six screws that were removed in Step 2. Torque the cover screws to 5
in-lbs (0.56 N•m). Reconnect the ECM-2 to the system.

ECM-2 0BTerminals and Connections


18 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 6. Contact Input Switch Locations (Left-Side View of ECM-2 with Cover Off)

Analog Outputs
Two isolated outputs provide analog signals that are directly proportional to ECM-2 or DECS-2100
system values selected by the user. Each analog output is individually adjustable for a signal range of –10
to +10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mAdc. The analog outputs are designated Out1 and Out2. Out1 terminal
assignments are 75 (+) and 76 (–) and Out2 terminal assignments are 77 (+) and 78 (–).

IRIG Input
This input can be used to synchronize the internal ECM-2 clock with a time signal supplied by an IRIG
time source. Keeping the ECM-2 clock synchronized with other devices enables accurate time stamping
of data during power system disturbances. The IRIG input complies with IRIG Standard 200-04 which
supports time, day, month, and year information. Input specifications include an input voltage range of
±20 Vdc, a logic-low voltage of 0.5 Vdc (maximum), and a logic-high voltage of 3.5 Vdc (minimum). IRIG
input terminal assignments are In and Gnd.

Fiber Optic Connectors


Connections on the right side of the module consist of interlocking, fiber-optic transmitters, and receivers.
Fiber-optic connectors are used for interlace with the Analog and Digital I/O Modules, sensing inputs from
the DECS-2100 Isolation Transducers, and the system power bridge(s). The use of fiber-optic cable and
connectors provides superior isolation and noise immunity. For systems using from one to four power
bridges, the ECM-2 is equipped with a single row of fiber-optic connectors. Applications requiring from
five to 16 power bridges have an ECM-2 module with two rows of fiber-optic connectors.

Analog I/O Module Connections


These three fiber-optic connections link the ECM-2 with up to four Analog I/O Modules. Each module is
polled by the ECM-2 for the status of the module’s two analog inputs and one RTD input. BESTCOMSPro
software can be used to connect the Analog I/O Module input and output data to any control software
block input or output in the ECM-2. Analog I/O Module connections consist of F19 (CLK), F20 (TX), and
F21 (RX).

0BTerminals and Connections ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 19

Digital I/O Module Connections


These three fiber-optic connections link the ECM-2 with up to four Digital I/O Modules. Each module is
polled by the ECM-2 for the status of the module’s 12 digital inputs. BESTCOMSPro software can be
used to connect the Digital I/O Module input and output data to any control software block input or output
in the ECM-2. Digital I/O Module connections consist of F22 (CLK), F23 (TX), and F24 (RX).

Isolation Transducer Connections


Fiber-optic communications to/from the DECS-2100 Isolation Transducers include provisions for monitoring
the digitized generator field voltage and current, exciter field voltage and current, and PPT voltage. Four
additional spare inputs may be used (with additional Isolation Transducers) to monitor other
system/generator values. Generator field connections are made at connectors F1 and F2. Exciter field
connections are made at connectors F3 and F4. PPT voltage connections are made at connectors F9 (VAC)
and F10 (VAB). Spare input connections are made at F5 (In2) and F6 (In1) and F7 (In4) and F8 (In3).

Power Bridge Connections


In its standard configuration, the ECM-2 is equipped with connections for controlling and monitoring up to
four power bridges. For applications requiring the control of up to 16 power bridges, the ECM-2 is
equipped with a second row of fiber-optic connections. Power bridge thyristor firing control data is routed
through these connections to the DECS-2100 Bridge Control Module(s). Power bridge temperature and
thyristor conduction data is also received from the Bridge Control Module(s) through these connections.
Table 2 lists the power bridge connection assignments.
Table 2. ECM-2 Power Bridge Connection Assignments
Bridge Bridge0 Bridge1 Bridge2 Bridge3 Bridge4 Bridge5 Bridge6 Bridge7 Bridge8
F11 (TX) F13 (TX) F15 (TX) F17 (TX) F25 (TX) F27 (TX) F29 (TX) F31 (TX) F33 (TX)
Connections
F12 (RX) F14 (RX) F16 (RX) F18 (RX) F26 (RX) F28 (RX) F30 (RX) F32 (RX) F34 (RX)

Bridge Bridge9 Bridge10 Bridge11 Bridge12 Bridge13 Bridge14 Bridge15 — —


F35 (TX) F37 (TX) F39 (TX) F41 (TX) F43 (TX) F45 (TX) F47 (TX)
Connections — —
F36 (RX) F38 (RX) F40 (RX) F42 (RX) F44 (RX) F46 (RX) F48 (RX)

ECM-2 0BTerminals and Connections


20 9411300990 Rev D

0BTerminals and Connections ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 21

BESTCOMS™Pro Software
BESTCOMS™Pro is a Windows®-based, PC application that provides a user-friendly, graphical user
interface (GUI) for use with Basler Electric communicating products. The name BESTCOMSPro is an
acronym that stands for Basler Electric Software Tool for Communications, Operations, Maintenance, and
Settings.
BESTCOMSPro provides the user with a point-and-click means to set and monitor Basler Electric
products. The capabilities of BESTCOMSPro make the configuration of one or several controllers fast and
efficient. It is a sophisticated tool for configuring, monitoring, maintaining, and debugging a programmable
controller. Typically BESTCOMSPro is used at installation to configure the controller and, thereafter, is
used to monitor operations and fine tune input values. BESTCOMSPro has been designed to merge the
high functionality of ccTool™ and the ease-of-use associated with BESTCOMSPlus®. A primary
advantage of this software is its capability to allow the user to create a configuration settings scheme,
save it to a file, and upload the settings to the controller at the user’s convenience. Multiple security levels
are provided to ensure that only authorized users can change the appropriate configuration information.
Customized workspaces can be saved and loaded to make switching between tasks easier and more
efficient. Figure 7 shows the key elements of the main working window.

Figure 7. Typical User Interface Components

Installation
System Requirements
BESTCOMSPro operates with systems using Windows® XP (32-bit), Windows Vista (32-bit), Windows 7
(32 and 64-bit). BESTCOMSPro is built on the Microsoft® .NET Framework. The setup utility that installs
BESTCOMSPro on your PC also installs the required version of .NET Framework (if not already
installed).
System recommendations for BESTCOMSPro are listed in Table 3.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


22 9411300990 Rev D

Table 3. System Recommendations for BESTCOMSPro


Component Recommendation
Processor 1 GHz
RAM 2 GB
Hard Drive Space 920 MB (~70 for BESTCOMSPro and 850 MB for .NET 4.0, 32 bit)

Installation
Step 1: Insert the BESTCOMSPro CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.
Step 2: When the BESTCOMSPro Setup and Documentation CD menu appears, click the Install button
for the BESTCOMSPro application. The setup utility installs BESTCOMSPro and the .NET
Framework on your PC (if not already installed).
When BESTCOMSPro installation is complete, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows programs
menu. This folder is accessed by clicking the Windows Start button and then accessing the Basler
Electric folder in the Programs menu. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon that starts
BESTCOMSPro when clicked.

Running BESTCOMS™Pro
To run BESTCOMSPro, click Start, point to All Programs, Basler Electric, and then click the
BESTCOMSPro icon. During initial startup, the BESTCOMSPro Select Language screen is displayed as
shown in Figure 8. You can choose to have this screen displayed each time BESTCOMSPro is started, or
you can select a preferred language and this screen is bypassed in the future. Click OK to continue. This
screen can be accessed later by selecting Tools and Select Language from the menu bar.

Figure 8. Select Language Window


The Basler Electric splash screen is displayed for a brief time. See Figure 9.

Figure 9. Basler Electric BESTCOMSPro Splash Screen

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 23

BESTCOMSPro will load and a log on dialog box appears. See Figure 10.

Figure 10. Log On Dialog Box


Enter your user initials and click the OK button.

Note
When you start BESTCOMSPro, the main BESTCOMSPro window
contains limited pull down menus, a brief tool bar, and a gray working
area.
To enable the full menu selection, toolbars, and windows a
connection to a controller must be established or a valid
configuration file must be loaded. After either of these occurs the
following elements appear.
• An extended toolbar along the top of the window.
• Two panels, called the 'View Explorer' and 'Settings Explorer',
which list the various windows and functions that are
available.
• A status bar in the bottom border of the window. The status
bar displays reference information such as the current
controller state and your security level. It also displays a brief
description of the block, input, or output as you work with
objects in a window.

Activation Key
When BESTCOMSPro is run for the first time, you are prompted to activate the software. If you choose
not to activate, you will have Security Level 1 (Read-Only) access to the device and to any configuration
files that are opened. If you choose to activate the software, you will receive an activation key from Basler
which also contains your default security level. Refer to Security Levels in this chapter for more
information.
To activate BESTCOMSPro and unlock the ability to tune and modify the configuration to better fit your
application, click Help, Activate BESTCOMSPro. The Activation Notice dialog box appears (Figure 11).

Figure 11. Activation Notice Dialog Box

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


24 9411300990 Rev D

If read-only access is the only type of access needed, then check the “Do not show this message again”
box and click OK.
Click the “Activate” button to proceed with BESTCOMSPro activation. The Activation window appears
(Figure 12). Enter the name of your company into the Company field and click the Email button. This sets
up an email to Basler Electric requesting an activation key. Click Send.

Figure 12. Activation Window


When the activation key is received, copy it from the email, paste it into the Activation Key field, and click
the Activate button. A notification appears if the key is incorrect. If the activation is successful, a
notification appears next to the Activate button. Click Close.

Connecting to an Excitation Control Module (ECM-2)


In order to utilize the capabilities of BESTCOMSPro you must first connect to the Excitation Control
Module (ECM-2), found within the DECS-2100. Connecting to the Bridge Control Module (BCM) is done
through the ECM-2, See Connecting to a BCM below. There are several methods used to connect to a
controller.
• Ethernet: Connect to a controller using a standard Ethernet cable.
• COM Port: Connect to a controller using a standard RS-232 cable.
• USB: Connect to a controller using a standard Type-B USB cable.
• Remote Connection: This option is not supported by the DECS-2100. It is used to connect to the
ECS2100.

Ethernet

Ensure that the PC is connected to the controller using a standard Ethernet cable.

Click Connect under the File menu or the button on the toolbar.
The Connect dialog box appears as shown in Figure 13.
Select the Ethernet tab.
Click the down arrow to the right of the Host Name drop down list, a list of options appears.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 25

Figure 13. Connection Window, Ethernet Tab


Click Add IP address. The IP Address dialog appears as shown in Figure 14.

Figure 14. Adding an IP Address


Enter the desired name of the new connection in the top field.
Enter the IP address in the bottom four fields and click OK.
Click Search. The Search Controllers dialog box appears as shown in Figure 15.

Figure 15. Searching for Controllers


BESTCOMSPro searches for connected devices. The search process can be shortened by decreasing
the range and timeout duration.
Click Close after the search is complete.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


26 9411300990 Rev D

Select the ECM-2 from the Address Drop down List and Click OK.
Wait for the connection process to complete.

COM Port

1. Ensure that the PC is connected to the controller using an RS-232 cable.

2. Click Connect under the File menu or the button on the toolbar.
3. The Connect dialog box appears as shown in Figure 16.
4. Select the COM Port tab.
5. Leave the default factory settings as they are.
6. Input “255” into the Address field.
7. Click OK.
8. Wait for the connection process to complete.

Figure 16. Connection Window, COM Port Tab

USB

1. Ensure that the PC is connected to the controller using a Type-B USB cable.
2. The Found New Hardware Wizard appears after powering on the ECM-2 and connecting the USB
cable.
3. Select, “No, not this time.” and click Next.
4. Select, “Install the software automatically (Recommended)”, and click Next.
5. Wait for the installation to complete. Click Finish.

6. Click Connect under the File menu or the button on the toolbar.
7. The Connect dialog box appears as shown in Figure 17.
8. Select the USB Tab.
9. Input “255” into the Address field.
10. Click OK.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 27

11. Wait for the connection process to complete.

Figure 17. Connection Window, USB Tab

Manual USB Driver Installation


A failure to establish communication through the USB port may be caused by a failure of the automatic
installation of the ECM-2 USB driver in Windows®. This condition is indicated by a Driver Software
Installation error message. To install the ECM-2 USB driver manually, perform the following steps.
1. Open the Windows Device Manager. Under Other Devices, right-click on ECM-2 (or Unknown
Device) and select Properties.
2. In the Properties window, select the Driver tab and click the Update Driver button.
3. Select “Browse my computer for driver software” and then navigate to:
C:\Program Files\Basler Electric\USB Device Drivers\USBIO
Install the USB driver software. Successful installation will be indicated by a confirmation
message.

Connecting to a BCM
First establish a connection to an ECM-2 using one of the methods described above. Click File, Bridge
Connect… The Bridge Connect dialog box appears (Figure 18).

Figure 18. Bridge Connect Dialog Box

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


28 9411300990 Rev D

Select a bridge from the Bridge drop-down list and click OK. Wait for connection to complete. If
connection cannot be established, alternate paths to the BCM can be specified. Click the Alternate Paths
button; the Alternate Bridge Paths dialog box appears (Figure 19). Follow the directions in the dialog box.
Use the Search button to automatically search for other controller addresses on the network. Click OK
when done.

Figure 19. Alternate Bridge Paths Dialog Box

Overview of Functions
Introduction
Most BESTCOMSPro capabilities lie in three main window types: the Configuration Window, the View
Explorer, and the Settings Explorer. The functions of these windows are described in this chapter. See
Figure 20 for locations of the configuration, View Explorer, and Settings Explorer windows.

Figure 20. Multiple Sessions, View and Settings Explorers Sub-Windows

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 29

Set State Icon


The Set State icon is used to view or change the state of the device. See Table 4.
Table 4. Set State Icon Descriptions
State Description
Open Config File - all off
< Resolved - all off
Resolved - red, yellow on; green off
Initialized - red on; green, yellow off
- red, yellow on; green off
Blocks Executing - green on; red, yellow off
- all on
Application Go - all off
- all on

Configuration Window
A configuration file stores the programmable logic block configuration and all controller settings. In
BESTCOMSPro multiple configuration sessions may be opened simultaneously and each session is
contained in its own window that can be manipulated via the 'Window' menu. The window in which you
are currently working is referred to as the active window and has a blue header. The configuration
window is indicated by the two configuration window locators in Figure 20.

Window Docking
A docking feature, within the view and settings explorers, allows arrangement and docking of multiple
metering screens. Clicking and dragging a metering screen tab displays a blue, transparent square,
several arrow boxes, and a tab box. These docking elements are illustrated in Figure 21.
Dragging the blue square to the “up” (locator A), “right” (locator B), or “down” (locator C) arrow box places
the selected metering screen across the top, along the side, or at the bottom of the window. Once placed,
the screen’s thumbtack icon can be clicked to dock the screen on the corresponding top, right, or lower
bar. A docked screen is viewed by hovering the mouse pointer over the docked screen.
Dragging the blue square to one of the four arrow boxes (locator D) places the screen inside the selected
window according to the arrow box selected. A metering screen can be placed as a tab inside the
selected window by dropping the screen on the tab box at the center of the four arrow boxes.
Dragging the blue square anywhere other than one of the arrow/tab boxes places the selected metering
screen as a floating window.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


30 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 21. Window Docking

Programmable Logic

Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices. Nonvolatile
memory is used to store information (such as settings) that needs to be
preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise restarted.
Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a physical limit on the
number of times they can be erased and written. In this product, the limit is
100,000 erase/write cycles. During product application, consideration should
be given to communications, logic, and other factors that may cause
frequent/repeated writes of settings or other information that is retained by the
product. Applications that result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce
the useable product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.

Introduction
BESTCOMSPro programmable logic is a programming method used for managing the input, output,
control, monitoring, and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric's DECS-2100 system. The DECS-2100
has multiple, self-contained logic blocks that have all of the inputs and outputs of its discrete component
counterpart. Each independent logic block interacts with control inputs and hardware outputs based on
logic variables defined in BESTCOMSPro. Configurations entered and saved in the DECS-2100 system's
nonvolatile memory integrate (electronically wire) the selected or enabled control blocks with control
inputs and hardware outputs. A group of connected functions, defining the logic of the DECS-2100, is
called a logic configuration.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 31

One default active logic configuration is pre-loaded into the DECS-2100. This scheme is configured for a
typical control application and virtually eliminates the need for "start-from-scratch" programming.
BESTCOMSPro can be used to open a logic configuration that was previously saved as a file and upload
it to the DECS-2100. The default logic configuration can also be customized to suit your application.
The BESTCOMSPro application is first used to define all configuration information in a file on the PC.
Once the controller is in a resolved state, BESTCOMSPro is used to download the information to the
Random Access Memory (RAM) of the controller. You then use BESTCOMSPro to fine tune configuration
values as needed within RAM. Because information in RAM is lost in the event of a power cycle, you save
the configuration information from RAM to permanent flash memory after you have tested and are
satisfied with the configuration. At power-up, the configuration is taken from flash and overwrites the RAM
values. Figure 22 illustrates the process.

Figure 22. Model for Programming a Controller

Easy Screens
All special functions within BESTCOMSPro are controlled by logic blocks including real-time monitoring,
auto-tuning, and event recording to name a few. Logic block inputs and outputs are changed to fit a
specific application, and when many changes are involved, the process can become tedious.
BESTCOMSPro provides easy screens to keep logic block tuning simple. Easy screens interface directly
with the associated logic block. Entering information into the fields of an easy screen is equivalent to
navigating to the block and changing the information manually. There are many different easy screens.
One example is the event recorder configuration window located in the Settings Explorer, General
Settings, Event Recorder Setup, Configuration. Typically, each of the four event recorder blocks are
manually set up by adding the block and then assigning inputs in either the diagram or application
configuration windows. When it is decided that a different set of events needs to be recorded, the data
inputs need to be changed, the number of samples taken, the number of pre-trigger samples, the number
of active channels, and so on. With the event recorder configuration window, there is no need to navigate
to each event recorder block in the diagram or application configuration window; all of the relevant
controls are in one place.

Controller States
Table 5 describes the controller states that are tracked within BESTCOMSPro.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


32 9411300990 Rev D

Table 5. Controller State Descriptions


State Description
Unknown This state indicates that there is no response from the controller or the response
cannot be understood. An unknown state can result from losing the connection to the
controller or an error in the controller. You cannot set this state. Once in this state,
the connection or controller problem must be corrected before operation can
continue.
Boot Use the Boot state only when you need to load new firmware into the controller.

Click in the toolbar or Set State under the Controller menu to open the Set Run State dialog box,
Figure 23.

Figure 23. Controller States Dialog Box

Programming a Controller
The following steps lead you through adding and assigning a logic block into an already existing logic
configuration. Since the DECS-2100 is already loaded with a working logic configuration, “starting-from-
scratch” programming is not covered.
1) Connect to Controller
a) Establish a connection to the control module that is to be programmed. A connection can either
be made to the excitation control module (ECM-2) or the bridge control module (BCM).
2) Copy RAM to File
a) Under the Configurations menu, click Copy RAM to File. The logic configuration currently loaded
in RAM is copied to the file. The configuration in the file can be altered while disconnected from
the control module.
3) Add Blocks
a) Navigate to a blank area of the diagram where you would like to place the logic block.

b) Click the Add Block button. The add block window appears. Select one of the available
“AND” blocks. The input, output, and execution strategies areas are enabled. See Figure 24.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 33

Figure 24. Add Block Window

4) Assign Inputs
a) The possible inputs are listed on the left side. Unassigned inputs are indicated by a yellow
warning symbol. Constants and available outputs are on the right side.
b) Select input “ANDXX_IN1” from the list on the left.
c) Click the From Output tab and select an output from the drop down list. This list contains all
possible outputs from all active logic blocks in the current configuration.
d) Assign outputs to the rest of the inputs for ANDXX.
e) Click OK when finished.
Connections can also be made by clicking and dragging a line from an output to an input in the diagram
window. See Assigning Blocks, Drawing a Connection Line above.
5) Copying the Configuration to RAM
Copying to RAM sends the entire configuration to the control module and overwrites all values currently in
RAM. The control module can then begin executing the new logic configuration. Be sure you want to do
this before proceeding. Below are some notes about copying to RAM:
• If you added or removed a block in the file configuration, changed the type of an input, or
changed input values, you must have a security level of Change Configurations to copy to RAM.
• All blocks in the file configuration must be completely configured before copying to RAM. If one or
more blocks are not completely configured, the Copy to RAM command allows you to configure
them at this point.
• The control module must be in the resolved state. If it is not, the Copy to RAM command asks if
you want to change the state to Resolved.
• The configuration you copy to RAM is not automatically put into execution. After copying, you
must change the state from Resolved to Executing Blocks as part of verifying the RAM
configuration.
To Copy to RAM:
Choose Copy to RAM from the Configurations menu.
If one or more blocks in the file configuration are not completely configured, a dialog asks if you want to
configure the blocks. Click Yes to have the operation proceed. Click No to cancel the copy.
If the controller state is not Resolved, a dialog asks if you want to change the state to Resolved. Click Yes
to change the state to Resolved, or No to cancel the copy.
A dialog warns you that the current values in RAM are to be overwritten and asks if you want to continue.
Click Yes to proceed, or No to cancel the copy.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


34 9411300990 Rev D

The file configuration values are copied to RAM.


6) Verifying the RAM Configuration
After copying to RAM, the new RAM values must be put into execution. The values can then be
monitored and fine tuned as needed to verify that they are correct.

a) Click the Set State icon in the toolbar, or choose Set State from the Controller menu.
b) Click the Executing Blocks radio button, and then click OK. The RAM configuration is put into
execution.
c) In the View Explorer, Diagram View, select Dgm RAM.
d) Check the Display RAM Values checkbox in the diagram window toolbox to display the actual
RAM values.
e) Monitor the RAM values to ensure that they are correct. If necessary, you can change an input
value but cannot change the input type.
7) Saving to Flash and File
When fine-tuning of the RAM configuration is complete, it can then be saved to flash. To create a backup
copy of the fine-tuned configuration, copy RAM or flash to the file configuration.
a) To save the RAM configuration to flash, choose Copy RAM to Flash from the Configurations
menu. A dialog asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite everything in flash.
b) To copy to the file configuration, choose Copy RAM to File or Copy Flash to File from the
Configurations menu. A dialog asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite everything in the file
configuration. After you copy, use Save or Save As to save the file configuration to disk.

Data Monitoring
BESTCOMS™Pro has two data monitoring functions: a data logger and an event recorder. The data
logger is used to sample system data at specified intervals. The event recorder is used to record system
data when specific triggers occur.

Data Logger
The data logger is a special function block that logs samples of data at designated intervals. Outputs from
other function blocks that you want to monitor are applied to the inputs of the data logger function block.
The time interval for sampling the data is also specified. Once the data logger is configured and enabled,
it records data at the prescribed intervals. Viewing of logged data is done at the user’s convenience.

Note
The data logger writes the sampled data to a 100,000 point buffer.
When the buffer is full, the data logger begins to overwrite the existing
data from the top of the buffer. The buffer is cleared when the state
changes to Executing or when you change an input while in the
Executing state. Before clearing the buffer, save the data to the PC
(See Managing Logger Data below). The logged data is saved to flash
memory every hour.

Data Logger Setup


Data logger setup is accomplished on a single BESTCOMSPro screen, illustrated in Figure 25. The
setup process consists of adding a data logger block to the configuration and then assigning other logic
block outputs to the data logger inputs. This process is outlined in the following steps.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 35

1. In the Settings Explorer of BESTCOMSPro, select and view the Data Recording Setup screen.
2. Select DATA_LOGGER from the list of logic blocks.
3. Place a checkmark in the Assigned checkbox to enable the data logger.
4. Select the number of desired data channels.
5. Enter the desired sample rate (interval) in seconds.
6. Make a data assignment for each monitored channel. Once the data assignments are made, the data
logger begins logging data from the specified logic block outputs at the logging interval specified.

Figure 25. Data Logger Configuration Screen

Event Recorders
An event recorder is a special function block that records the values related to an event. Set up an event
recorder when you want to capture the data related to a single event. You specify the inputs to the
function block as the event triggers and you specify the outputs that you want to record. You enable the
event recorder when you want the controller to start monitoring for an occurrence of the trigger. When the
trigger occurs, the event is recorded and an Attentions notification is displayed in the upper, right area of
the BESTCOMSPro window. This notification informs you that event data is available for viewing. Event
recorders are configured on a single event recorder setup screen which is illustrated in Figure 26. event
recorder attributes and settings are described in the following paragraphs.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


36 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 26. Event Recorder Configuration Screen

Event Record Triggers


There are two types of event record triggers: logic and float. For a logic trigger, you define whether a true
or false value for a specific output triggers the event. For a float trigger, an event is triggered if the value
of a specific output falls outside a minimum and maximum value that you define. The event recorder
saves both pre-trigger and post-trigger data. You specify a time interval for sampling the data and how
many samples you want taken for the pre-trigger and total samples.

Figure 27. Assign Input Window


Logic Triggers
Logic triggers are selected through the Logic Trigger tab of the event recorder setup screen. Clicking the
button beside the logic trigger field opens the Assign Input window of Figure 27. This window has two
tabs: From Output and Constant. Any active logic block (and its outputs) on the From Output tab can be
selected as a trigger.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 37

Float Triggers
Float triggers are selected through the Float Trigger tab of the vent recorder setup screen. Clicking the
button beside the float trigger field opens the Assign Input window of Figure 27. This window has two
tabs: From Output and Constant. Any active logic block (and its outputs) on the From Output tab can be
selected as a trigger.
Rise/Fall Levels
The Rise Level and Fall Level values define the threshold at which the selected trigger signal will trigger
the event.

Buffer Allocation
The event recorder does not have any of the buffer overwrite concerns that were noted previously for the
data logger. Four event recorder logic blocks are available in BESTCOMSPro. Eight channels of data can
be recorded per block. A total of 100,000 samples can be taken per block. This number of samples is
divided equally between the active channels, so 50,000 samples can be recorded per channel on a two-
channel record and 12,500 samples can be recorded per channel on an eight-channel record.
The buffer allocation bar, found on the event recorder configuration screen shows the percentage of the
buffer that has been reserved for recording.

Function Block Inputs


Table 6 lists the event recorder block inputs.
Table 6. Event Recorder Block Inputs
Input Name Description
DATA1 – These inputs represent the eight data channels. Each channel records data from a
DATA8 logic block output.
ENABLE This input enables or disables the event recorder.
NSAMPLES This input accepts the total number of samples to be taken.
PRE_TRIG This input accepts the number of total samples to be recorded before the trigger.
RATE This input accepts the multiplier of the sampling rate. The minimum sampling rate is
1 millisecond between samples.
NSIGNALS This input accepts the number of channels to use when recording data.
TRIG_FLT This input is assigned to the output of a logic block to act as the trigger source. If a
float trigger is not needed, then a constant (0) can be assigned to this input, disabling
it.
RISE_LEVEL This input accepts the high level. When the TRIG_FLT input value exceeds this input
value then the event triggers.
FALL_LEVEL This input accepts the low level. When the TRIG_FLT input value drops below this
input value then the event triggers.
TRIG_LOG This input is assigned to the output of a logic block to act as the trigger source. When
this input receives a 1 (true) from the source it triggers the event. If a logic trigger is
not needed, then a constant (false) can be assigned to this input, disabling it.

Configuration
An event recorder block can be added to the file configuration or removed from the file configuration by
using the Assigned checkbox. This option is enabled only when the File radio button is selected.
Up to eight channels of data can be selected for an event record through the Number of Channels field.
The default, total number of data samples can be customized by clicking the Override button and entering
the desired number in the Number of Samples field. The number of pre-trigger data samples can be
adjusted, up to the value of the total number of samples, through the Pre-Trigger Samples field. The read-
only Post-Trigger Samples field automatically adjusts to reflect changes in the number of pre-trigger
samples selected.
ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software
38 9411300990 Rev D

The data sample rate, expressed in milliseconds, is used to establish a multiplier of the sampling rate and
is entered in the Sample Rate field.

Channels
Data channels for each event recorder can be viewed and edited by selecting the desired event record
located under Data Recording Blocks. The selected channels and their assignments are then displayed in
tabular format on the event recorder configuration screen. Clicking a channel assignment field presents a
submenu containing a button beside the channel assignment field. Clicking this button opens an Assign
Input window where logic outputs and the corresponding constants can be selected.

Setup
Event recorder setup is accomplished on a single BESTCOMSPro screen, illustrated in Figure 26. The
setup process consists of selecting the trigger source, configuring the record parameters, and making the
logic assignments for each channel. This process is outlined in the following steps.
1. In the Settings Explorer of BESTCOMSPro select and view the Data Recording Setup screen.
2. Select one of the four event recorders from the Data Recording Blocks list.
3. Decide whether a logic trigger or float trigger is appropriate for the task.
a. If a logic trigger is desired, access the Assign Input window by clicking the button adjacent to the
Logic Trigger field on the Logic Trigger tab. On the Assign Input window, select the desired logic
block output to trigger the record and select the constant (condition) which will trigger the record.
b. If a float trigger is desired, access the Assign Input window by clicking the button adjacent to the
Float Trigger field on the Float Trigger tab. On the Assign Input window, select the desired logic
block output to trigger the record and select the constant (condition) which will trigger the record.
Return to the Float Trigger tab and enter the desired Rise and Fall levels (thresholds).
4. Assign the desired number of recording channels in the Number of Channels field.
5. If the number of desired record samples differs from the default value, place a checkmark in the
Override checkbox and enter the desired number of samples in the Number of Samples field.
6. Establish the desired number of pre-trigger samples in the Pre-Trigger Samples field.
7. Enter the sample rate multiplier (in milliseconds) in the Sample Rate field.
8. Make variable assignments to each channel for the data record. This process consists of accessing
the Assign Input window and selecting the desired logic block outputs and constants. Repeat this step
for each of the remaining channels.

Managing Logger Data


Viewing, Saving, and Clearing Data
Select Events & Data Loggers in the View Explorer, Reports. This displays the Events & Data Loggers
window, as shown in Figure 28.
Find the data logger or event recorder in the list and click the View button to display the graph.
Clicking Save gives you the option to save the graph as a data logger (.dlg), text (.txt), CSV (.csv), or
IEEE COMTRADE (.cfg) file.
Clear resets the graph data.

Figure 28. Events & Data Loggers Window

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 39

Loading Logger Data


Under the File menu, point to Data Logger and click Open Data Logger File… from the menu. The data
logger graph appears and displays the file in graph form.
Manipulating the Graph
Figure 29 displays the locations of channel select, Y-zoom, zoom factor, C1, C2, and the status bar.

Figure 29. Graph Window Locators


The data logger / event recorder graph commands are listed in Table 7.
Table 7. Graph Commands
Command Description
File
Close Close the current file.
Save Save the current file.
Save As… Save the current file under a different name.
View
Time Information Show / hide time information.
Channel Data Properties Displays a window containing a list of the data logger channel outputs.
Cursor 1 / 2
Move into View Move cursor 1 / 2 into center of view.
Goto Move center of view to cursor 1 / 2.
Selected Item
Goto Move center of view to the selected item.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


40 9411300990 Rev D

Command Description
Move into View Move the selected item into center of view.
Options: Cursors
Snap to Data Points The cursor snaps to the nearest data point.
Set Slider to Cursor Colors The cursor slider becomes the color of the cursor.
Options: Channels
Display Channel Names The channel name is displayed on the left.
Set Slider to Selected The channel slider becomes the color of the channel.
Channel Color
Highlight Selected Highlights the selected channel. The data points and lines become
bold.
Set all Channels to Default Resets zoom on all channels.
Vertical Scales
Zoom all Channels Enable or disable simultaneous zoom on all channels.
Options: Data Lines
Display Data Points Show / hide data points.
Show Point Values on The data point value is displayed in the tooltip.
Mouseover
None Hides the connecting lines between data points.
Step Connecting lines between data points are displayed as a series of
steps.
Interpolated Connecting lines between data points are smoothed.
Smooth Connecting lines between data points are smoothed.
Options: X-Axis
Auto Fit Automatically fits the window to the width (x-axis) of the data points.
Show Dates on Axis The time and date appears along the x-axis at each major division.
Format: No Format Displays time along the x-axis in milliseconds.
Format: Duration (00:05:45) Displays time along the x-axis in this format.
Format: Formatted Time Displays time along the x-axis in this format.
(5 min, 45 s)
Set Window Size Choose window size between 25 ms and 12 months.
Options: Grid
Set Background Color Choose any color to set as the background.
Hide Grid Lines Show / hide the grid lines.
Set Grid Height Set grid height between 100 and 5000.
Below the Toolbar
Selected Channel Y-Zoom This slider changes the Y-axis zoom.
Zoom Factor The Y-axis zoom slider position is multiplied by the number selected in
this list.
C1, C2 Assign the cursor to a different channel by selecting the channel from
this list.
Right Click in the Graph
Copy Copy an image of the graph to the clipboard.
BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 41

Command Description
Save Image As… Save the image of the graph as a .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp file.
Page Setup… Prepare the page for printing.
Print… Print the graph.
Show Point Values Enables or disables the data point value to be displayed in the tooptip
on mouseover.
Goto Cursor 1 / 2 Move center of view to cursor 1 / 2.
Move Cursor 1/ 2 into View Move cursor 1 / 2 into center of view.
Goto Selected Item Move center of view to selected item.
Move Selected Item into View Move selected item into center of view.
Status Bar
C1 X Displays the current position of cursor 1 on the x-axis in seconds.
C1 Y Displays the value of the data point that intersects with cursor 1.
C2 X Displays the current position of cursor 2 on the x-axis in seconds.
C2 Y Displays the value of the data point that intersects with cursor 2.
dX Displays the time difference between cursor 1 and 2 on the x-axis in
seconds.
dY Displays the difference between the data point values that intersect
cursor 1 and 2.
Channel Select Drop-down List: Displays a list of all active channels (up to 12). Each channel has
options for channel select, ID number, name, visibility, color, cursor 1 and cursor 2. See Figure 30.
Click the box in the first column of the channel to select it as the active channel, an arrow icon appears in
the box to indicate that the channel has been selected.
The ID number corresponds to the data logger logic block input of the same number.
The Name field stores the name of the channel, a custom name can be entered.
Clicking the Visible box shows or hides the channel.
Channel colors can be selected by clicking the Color button.
One or both cursors can be assigned to a channel by clicking the corresponding radio button.

Figure 30. Channel Select Drop-down List

Monitor View Setup


A monitor view is a set of memory locations that can be monitored in one place. The user can select
between logic block inputs and outputs, memory / MODBUS, holding registers, and coils.
Setup Procedure
1. Open the Monitor View Setup window under Settings Explorer, General Settings (Figure 31).
ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software
42 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 31. Monitor View Setup Screen

2. Click Add to add a new monitor view. This expands the current window, adding a second division.
3. In the second division, there is a Monitor Window Name field. Enter the desired name for the new
monitor view.
4. In the second division, click Add to add a new memory location. This expands the current window
further, creating a third division.
5. In the third division, select a location to monitor from one of the three tabs labeled Registers,
Inputs/Outputs, and Memory. The Registers tab has additional selections for configuring coils as
monitored locations. It also has additional controls (not shown here) for working with 32-bit values.
Two 16-bit holding registers can be combined into a single 32-bit value. The Swap button specifies
how the registers are combined while the Swap Registers checkbox reverses the sequence of the
registers.
6. Click Apply. The third division of the window is removed. More locations can be added at this point by
repeating steps 4 and 5.
7. In the second division, click Save when all of the desired memory locations are set. The second
division is removed and new monitor view appears in the original monitor view setup window.
8. The monitor view that was just created now appears in View Explorer, System Views, Monitor Views.
Clicking the monitor view displays a window containing all the specified memory locations in table
form.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 43

Figure 32. Monitor View Window

View Explorer
The View Explorer is a convenient tool within BESTCOMSPro used to navigate through the various
windows. After you connect to a controller or load a saved configuration file, you can use the View
Explorer to display one or more of the following windows in the working area of the main configuration
window. Different window options appear depending on the type of connected control module. Each tab
displayed to the right upon clicking the View Explorer options can be undocked and made into a free
floating window. The View Explorer panel can be hidden via the View drop down button on the toolbar.
The ‘x’ button hides the View Explorer and the thumbtack icon allows it to be docked. A docked screen is
viewed by hovering the mouse pointer over the docked screen.

View Explorer Windows


The window options that are available to an excitation control module (ECM-2) differ from those available
to a bridge control module (BCM). Table 8 lists the windows available to the specific control modules.
Table 8. Control Module View Explorer Window Availability
Window ECM-2 BCM
System Views
Diagram View Windows ● ●
Execution View Windows ● ●
Mainline Execution View ●
Application Config View ● ●
Memory View (only available with Security Level 5) ● ●
Monitor Views ● ●
Metering
Control Panel ●
Sync Panel ●
Generator ●
Main Field ●
Adjuster ●
Limiter ●
GSU Transformer ●
PPT ●
Exciter Field ●

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


44 9411300990 Rev D

Window ECM-2 BCM


Other ●
Real Time Clock ● ●
Status
System Status ●
Alarms (Status) ●
Limiters ●
System Trip ●
Transfer ●
Inputs ● ●
Outputs ●
Bridge Status ●
Commissioning Windows (All) ●
Reports Windows (All) ● ●

Indicators
Many of the metering screens, within the View Explorer, contain indicators. These color-coded indicators
display the current mode of their corresponding function. Usually associated with status or mode
indicators, green denotes a TRUE condition. A red indicator denotes a TRUE condition as well, but is
associated with alarm/error and breaker status. Yellow denotes a picked-up status for alarms and limiters.
Indicators are always gray when denoting a FALSE condition. Figure 33, Figure 34, and Figure 35
illustrate the different indicator colors.

Figure 33. Limiters Window: Yellow, Red, and Gray Indicators

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 45

Figure 34. System Status Window: Green and Gray Indicators

Figure 35. Alarms Window: Red and Gray Indicators

Diagram View
The Diagram View windows display and allow manipulation of a block diagram representation of a
configuration in file and RAM. Flash diagrams can only be viewed. See Figure 36.

Figure 36. Diagram View Window


The diagram window is the workspace where programming can be done in BESTCOMSPro. In this
window the logic block configuration is represented graphically, logic blocks and their connections can be
easily manipulated using click-and-drag and right click popup options. Undocking the diagram window
ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software
46 9411300990 Rev D

allows the user to move it to a more convenient location or even a second monitor. Pan, zoom, and
search functions are available for easy navigation.

Setting up the Diagram View Windows


There are three types of diagram windows.
• Dgm Flash: Allows the user to view the current logic configuration stored in the flash.
• Dgm RAM: Allows the user to view and fine tune the current logic configuration stored in RAM.
• Dgm File: Allows the user to view a configuration file saved on the PC, create a new
configuration file, or make changes to an existing one.
In the View Explorer, System Views, Diagram View, Click Dgm Flash, Dgm RAM, or Dgm File to display
the desired diagram window.

Window Contents
The diagram window displays a great deal of information to the user. The information is categorized and
described below. Figure 37 shows connected logic blocks in the diagram window.
RAM Runtime Values: Monitor runtime values when the RAM configuration is displayed.
Object Specific Commands: Right-click on an input, output, connection, or block to display a menu of
commands specific to that type of object.
Show / Hide Elements: Display or hide connections and blocks to view only the information of interest.
Block information is shown in the Diagram window (except when you are displaying the actual RAM
runtime values) as follows:
• Inputs are shown on the left of the block and outputs on the right of the block. The input and
output names (or abbreviated names) are shown inside the block.
• Constant values are shown above the connection line, such as for the K1 through KC inputs of
the AUTO_REG block.
• Connections can be made visible or invisible. When visible, the connection line is shown as
illustrated below for the connection between the VOLT_ERROR output of the AUTO_REG block
and the VOLT_ERROR input of the AUTO_MXR block. When invisible, the output name appears
next to the input line, as illustrated below for AUTO_REG inputs such as PSS2_OUT.
• When an output has multiple connections, the number of connections is shown on the output line,
such as for the VOLT_ERROR output of the AUTO_REG block.
• Pink lines in the diagram indicate that the line is not orthogonal. You can add points to make the
line orthogonal.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 47

Figure 37. Block Inputs and Outputs

Diagram Toolbar Commands


The diagram window has its own special commands and tools for the creation and manipulation of logic
block configurations. The location of the menu commands and the toolbar is shown in Figure 38.

Figure 38. Diagram Window Toolbar Location

Table 9 describes the available menu and toolbar commands for the diagram window.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


48 9411300990 Rev D

Table 9. Menu and Toolbar Commands


Menu Items Description
View
Zoom to Fit Zooms out until the diagram fits into the current window.
Zoom to Box Zooms in to an area that you specify by drawing a rectangle.
Zoom to Base View Zooms the diagram to a one-to-one ratio. Position the cursor at the
location that you want to be the center of the new zoomed area, and
then left click.
Zoom In Zooms in incrementally.
Zoom Out Zooms out incrementally.
Block Properties Opens a window showing the status of existing blocks.
View Page Breaks Displays lines in the diagram to represent the boundaries of individual
pages if printed.
Display Engineering Units Toggles visibility of engineering units in diagram.
Display RAM Values Toggles visibility of RAM values in diagram.
Redraw Redraws the diagram.
Refresh RAM Values Refreshes RAM values.
Navigation Window Displays a map of the diagram in a new window. Drag a box to zoom
to that location.
Tools
Find… Search for blocks.
Allow Dynamic Edit Enables or disables dynamic edit. You must enable dynamic edit in
order to edit the drawing and configuration information.
Export to Metafile Save diagram in metafile format.
Resize Drawing Canvas Input exact dimensions to resize diagram window.
Page Setup… Change printer settings and page size.
Show Invisible Ports Toggles visibility of invisible ports.
Toolbar
Enables or disables dynamic edit. You must enable dynamic edit in
Toggle Dynamic Edit order to edit the drawing and configuration information.
Dragging the cursor anywhere in the diagram (either on an object or
Pan outside an object) pans the diagram.
Dragging the cursor when not on a block or connection line draws a
Rectangle Select Mode rectangle and selects the objects in the rectangle.
Click anywhere in the diagram to zoom in.
Zoom In Mode
Zooms out until the diagram fits into the current window.
Zoom to Fit
Zooms in to an area that you specify by drawing a rectangle.
Zoom to Box
Zooms the diagram to a one-to-one ratio. Position the cursor at the
Zoom to Base View (1:1) location that you want to be the center of the new zoomed area, and
then left click.
Zooms in incrementally.
Zoom In

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 49

Menu Items Description


Zooms out incrementally.
Zoom Out
In the RAM configuration when the controller is executing, you can use
Toggle RAM Values this command to view or hide RAM values.

Shortcut Menus
Different shortcut menus are displayed depending on where you right-click in the diagram window. The
shortcut menus are illustrated below in Figure 39.

Figure 39. Right-Click Shortcut Menus in Diagram Window

Navigating in the Diagram


As stated above, there are three types of diagram windows. There are also three types of execution
windows. All of these windows including others contain information on the active logic blocks in a
configuration. Navigating to a specific logic block in a specific window can be confusing. BESTCOMSPro
has several powerful tools to make navigation easy.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


50 9411300990 Rev D

Panning and Scroll Bars

Pan: Use the pan tool to move the diagram in any direction by clicking in a blank area of the
diagram and dragging.
Scroll Bars: Standard scroll bars.

The Find Command


Use the Find command (Tools menu, Find…) to search for any logic block in any window. The drop down
list at the top contains all of the searchable windows, the list at the bottom contains all of the searchable
logic blocks, and specific names can be entered into the blank field in the middle.
Pan to Connection
Use Pan to Connection to automatically center view on the opposite end of the current connection. Right
click on an input or output (not the connection line) and select Pan to Connection. The entire connection
line blinks blue and the input / output connectors blink red. Click anywhere to end the blinking.
Pan to Block
Use Pan to Block to automatically center view on a block selected from a list of active blocks. Click the
Show Block Properties check box in the diagram window. This opens a docked window containing a list of
all active blocks. Find the desired block in the list and right click, select Pan to Block. The block is
centered in view and blinking.
Find in Window
Use Find in Window to center view on the same selected logic block, input, output, or connection line in a
different window. For example, if you’re viewing a logic block in the Dgm Flash window and want to make
changes to the same block in the Dgm RAM window. Right click on a logic block, input, output, or
connection line and point to Find in Window a sub-menu appears with a list of window options.
Navigation Window
The navigation window displays a miniature map of the entire diagram. Click and drag a box in the
navigation window to zoom to that location in the diagram window. The Navigation Window command is
found under the View menu.
Zooming
The zoom commands and their descriptions can be found above in the Menu and Toolbar Commands
table.

Assigning Blocks in the Diagram


Adding a Block

• Under the Configurations pull down menu click Add Block or click the icon on the toolbar.
• Select the block to be added from the list.
• Select the execution strategy tab and select a number of execution cycles from the drop down list.
• Click on a lower cell in the table to change the position of the time slices.
• Select the Input Assignment tab.
• To change the assignment type, click the Constant or From Output tab.
• For a constant value, type a value and click the radio button that identifies the type of value as
decimal, hexadecimal...
• For a From Output value, select the block and output from the drop-down lists.
• If there are any potential problems with this assignment, a confirmation dialog asks you to verify
making the assignment. Click Yes to continue, or No to return to the Input Assignment dialog.
• Repeat for all remaining inputs.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 51

• In this example all block inputs have been assigned. To end the command, click OK. If all inputs had
not been assigned, the unassigned input(s) would be listed in the Configure Blocks dialog under
Configurations.
• The block is now added to the configuration. However, the newly added block is not visible in the
diagram. See Displaying and Positioning a Block, below, for details on block visibility.
Displaying and Positioning a Block

Enable Dynamic Edit . Click the Show Block Properties check box in the diagram window. This
opens a docked window containing a list of all active blocks and their visibility status. Find the desired
block in the list and right click, select Display Block. The block is centered in view and blinking. Click and
drag the block to the desired location.
Selecting and Moving Blocks

Enable Dynamic Edit to move blocks.

To move a single block, click and drag the block. (In Pan Mode or Select Rectangle Mode )
To move multiple blocks, hold down the Ctrl key and select each block, then click and drag one of the
selected blocks to move them all.

In Rectangle Select Mode , position the cursor outside of the blocks and drag to draw a selection box
around the blocks. Click and drag one of the selected blocks to move them all.
Any connection lines to the blocks are automatically adjusted as you move the blocks. You do not need to
select the connection lines.
Drawing a Connection Line
Position the cursor over the input line for which you want to draw a connection. The input can be
unassigned, a constant that you want to change into a connection, or a connection that you want to
change into a different output. The cursor must be positioned exactly over the input line.
Click and drag to draw a line representing the connection.
Release the button over the output to which you want to connect. The output line is highlighted.
If there are any potential problems with this assignment, a confirmation dialog asks you to verify making
the assignment. Click Yes to make the assignment, or No to cancel it.
Adding Points and Reshaping Connection Lines
To add one point, position the cursor over the line at the location you wish to add the point. To add
multiple evenly spaced points, position the cursor anywhere over the line.
Right click on the connection line to display the shortcut menu.
Choose Add Point(s), and then choose the number of points from the submenu. If you chose to add 1
point, it is added at the location you clicked. If you choose to enter multiple points, they are evenly placed
along the line (or along the line segment if you previously added points and re-shaped the line to have
multiple segments).
To re-shape the line, click and drag a point.
You can repeat these steps as needed to continue to add points and re-shape the line.
You can only drag line segments that are vertical or horizontal, and are not the starting or ending line
segment. The shape of the cursor indicates the type of movement allowed. See Table 10.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


52 9411300990 Rev D

Table 10. Connection Line Movement Cursors

Move Segment Move Segment


Move Point Unable to Move Segment
Vertically Horizontally

Entering Assignment Values


In addition to assigning input in the diagram window by drawing connection lines, you can assign inputs
by entering the values in a dialog box. This method can be used to assign inputs that are constants or
block outputs.

Enable Dynamic Edit .


Navigate to the desired block.
Right click the block and select Configure Block. This opens the Configure Block dialog box, as shown in
Figure 40. The possible inputs are listed on the left side. Unassigned inputs are indicated by a yellow
warning symbol. Constants and available outputs are on the right side.
Select an input from the list on the left.
To connect the input to an output of a different logic block, click the From Output tab and select that
output from the drop down list.
To assign the input a constant value, click the Constant tab, input the constant value in the field, and
select the radio button of the appropriate numbering system (decimal, hexadecimal…).

Figure 40. Assigning Inputs in the Configure Block Dialog Box

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 53

Execution View
The Execution View presents execution strategy (cycles) in matrix form. The time slots of the cycles are
listed along the top of the matrix. The logic blocks are listed down the side. The cells within the matrix
represent block execution in that cycle. See Figure 41.

Figure 41. Execution View Window

Setting up the Execution View Windows


There are three types of Execution View windows.
• Exe Flash: Allows the user to view the execution strategy configuration stored in flash.
• Exe RAM: Allows the user to view and fine tune the execution strategy configuration stored in RAM.
• Exe File: Allows the user to view and fine tune the execution strategy configuration stored in the file.
In the View Explorer, System Views, Diagram View, Click Exe Flash, Exe RAM, or Exe File to display the
desired execution view window.

Window Contents
The file, RAM, or flash execution strategy of all logic blocks is displayed in the execution view windows.

Execution Toolbar Commands


The Tools menu is different for each type of execution view window. Table 11 shows the options available
in flash, file, and RAM.
View Options: Show or hide the Modified By column.
Reference (Radio Buttons): Set file, RAM, or flash as a reference. When you display a configuration that
is not the reference, values that differ from those in the reference configuration are shown in red.
For example, the Exe File window is open and the reference is set to RAM. File is compared to RAM, and
any differences are in red.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


54 9411300990 Rev D

Table 11. Execution View Window Commands


Tools Menu Option Description Flash File RAM
Find Search for blocks. * * *
Reorder Rearrange the logic block execution order. * *
Reset Execution Times Resets the execution timer. *
Refresh Execution
Refreshes execution times. *
Times
Right Click
Set Executions per Choose between 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, or 16 executions per
* †
Cycle cycle.
Reorder Arrange logic block order of execution. * †
Find in Window Find the selected block in a different window. * * *
* This option is available.
† This option is available when the controller state is Resolved.

Changing Execution Cycles


Execution Order
Right click in the table to change the order in which the blocks execute.
Executions per Cycle
Right click a row to change the executions per cycle. If all cells for a block are blank, which means
nothing has been assigned, you can click a cell to add one execution per cycle or right click to assign the
executions per cycle. Click a cell that has a dash (-) and the block then executes in that time slot.

Application Configuration View


Displays all of the configuration information in table form. See Figure 42.

Figure 42. Application Config View Window

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 55

The application configuration window is a very powerful tool. It displays all information on every logic
block in table form. The information can be easily navigated with the use of intuitive column sorting
functions, search commands, information filters, and the ability to show or hide information. The
application configuration table is commonly used to track the changes that have been made to a
configuration in a file or RAM.
To open the application configuration window click Application Config View, in the View Explorer, under
System Views.

Window Contents
The application configuration table displays a great deal of information. Every active logic block is shown
in its own row. Each row can then be expanded to show all inputs, outputs, and parameters of that logic
block, as shown in Figure 43.

Figure 43. Application Configuration Table with an Expanded Block

Application Configuration Window Commands


Table 12 describes the available menu and toolbar commands for the application configuration window.
Table 12. Application Configuration Window Menus and Commands
Menu Items Description
Edit
Find… (F3) Search for blocks.
Search Grid… (F4) Search for blocks within the application configuration table.
Find Config Differences Automatically searches for and displays configuration
differences in the table.
Find Next Config Difference (F7) Automatically searches for and displays the next configuration
difference in the table.
Clear Highlights Clears highlighted cells in the table.
View
Collapse All Collapses all sub-menus in table.
Refresh RAM Values Refreshes RAM values in table.
Refresh Selected RAM Values Refreshes the RAM values for the selected items in table.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


56 9411300990 Rev D

Menu Items Description


Clear Selected RAM Values Clears the RAM values for the selected items in table.
Toolbox
View Options Tab Contains options for changing the Reference Input
Assignment and other view related options.
Properties Options Tab Contains options for hiding or displaying columns in the
application configuration table.
RAM Refresh Tab Contains options for setting RAM refresh rate and selecting
which inputs refresh their RAM values.
Filters Tab Contains options for hiding or displaying a selection and
adding or editing filters.

Navigating in the Table


As stated above, the application configuration window displays all information on every logic block in table
form. Navigating to a specific logic block, input, or output can be confusing. BESTCOMSPro has several
powerful tools to make navigation easy.
Scroll Bars and Arrow Keys
Arrow Keys: When a cell in the table is selected, the arrow keys move the selection one unit in the
direction of the arrow that was pressed.
Page Up and Page Down Keys: When a cell in the table is selected, The Page Up key moves the
selection up one page. The Page Down key moves the selection down one page.
Home and End Keys: When a cell in the table is selected, the End key moves the selection to the last
cell of the row. The Home key moves the selection to the first cell of the row.
Scroll Bars: Standard scroll bars.
The Find Command
Use the Find command (Edit menu, Find…) to search for any logic block, input, or output in any window.
The drop down list at the top contains all of the searchable windows, the list at the bottom contains all of
the searchable logic blocks, and specific names can be entered into the blank field in the middle.
Search Grid
Use Search Grid (Edit menu, Search Grid) to search for blocks within the application configuration table.
Input the specific name of the item in the field at the top. Choose current column only or entire grid and
the search order.
Find Configuration Differences
Use the Find Configuration Differences command (Edit menu, Find Config Differences) to mark the
differences in a configuration versus the reference configuration. For example, changes were made to a
configuration stored in the file and needs to be compared to the original configuration stored in RAM.
Under the View Options tab, select RAM Input Assignment (this sets it as the reference configuration) and
then use the Find Config Differences command to highlight all of the changes that were made.
Find Next Configuration Difference: Use the Find Next Config Difference command (Edit menu, Find
Next Config Difference) to view the configuration differences one at a time starting from the selected cell.
Pan to Connection
Use Pan to Connection to automatically display the cell containing the input or output connected to the
current connection. Right click anywhere in the row of a block output that is a connection or the output
value in the File Input, Flash Input, or RAM Input cell of a block input row and select Pan to Connection.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 57

Find in Window
Use Find in Window to display the cell of the same selected logic block, input, or output from a different
window. For example, if you’re viewing a logic block in the Dgm Flash window and want to view the
corresponding cell in the application configuration window. Right click on a logic block, input, output or
connection line and point to Find in Window a sub-menu appears with a list of window options. Select App
Configuration.

Assigning Blocks in the Table


In addition to assigning inputs in the diagram window by drawing connection lines, you can assign inputs
by entering the values in a dialog box from within the application configuration window. This method can
be used to assign inputs that are constants or connections.
Navigate to the cell of the desired input.
Right click the input cell and select File Assignment or RAM Assignment. This opens the Assign Input
dialog box. Constants and available outputs are on the right side.
To connect the input to an output of a different logic block, click the From Output tab and select that
output from the drop down list.
To assign the input a constant value, click the Constant tab, input the constant value in the field, and
select the radio button of the appropriate numbering system (decimal, hexadecimal…).

Mainline Execution View (BCM only)


Displays a table showing whether or not each mainline block is going to execute. This view is only
available by connecting to a BCM or opening the configuration file of a BCM. See Figure 44.

Figure 44. Mainline Execution View Window

Memory View
Displays the contents of all memory locations. See Figure 45.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


58 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 45. Memory View Window

Monitor View
This screen displays the contents of a set of pre-defined user-selected memory locations. See Figure 46.

Figure 46. Monitor View Window

Real-Time Monitoring
Proper voltage regulator performance is critical to power system stabilizer performance. Step response
measurements of the voltage regulator should be performed to confirm the AVR gain and other critical
parameters. A transfer function measurement between terminal voltage reference and terminal voltage
should be performed with the machine operating at very low load. This test provides an indirect
measurement of the PSS phase requirement. As long as the machine is operating at very low load, the
terminal voltage modulation does not produce significant speed and power changes.
The BESTCOMSPro Real-Time Monitoring (RTM) Analysis screen can be used to perform and monitor
on-line AVR and PSS testing. It is found in View Explorer, System Views. Up to six plots of user-selected

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 59

data can be generated and the logged data can be stored in a file for later examination. In order to start
plotting data, the following two conditions must be met. The RTM logic block must be in the logic
configuration (it is by default) and its inputs assigned to block outputs (not constants). The controller run
state must be set to Executing Blocks. RTM Analysis screen controls and indications are illustrated in
Figure 47.

Figure 47. Real Time Monitoring Window


With the RTM Analysis screen controls, you can:
• Select the parameters to be graphed
• Adjust the resolution of the graph x axis and graph y axis
• Start and stop plot captures
• Export graph data as comma separated value (.CSV) or COMTRADE file formats.
• Print a captured graph

Graph Parameters
Logic block inputs/outputs and system parameters can be displayed in the graph areas. These graph
parameters are sorted into two separate lists. The active list type can be toggled by clicking the Change

View/Data Type button ( or ). This button visually changes depending on which list type is

active. Clicking the switches to the logic block data type mode, and clicking the switches to
the system parameters data type mode.

Logic Block Parameters

The logic block input/output selection window (Figure 48) is displayed by clicking on the button at
the top of the graph when logic block data type mode. Select the logic block from the drop down list at the
top of the window and then the available inputs and outputs are displayed in the lower list area. Select the
desired input or output from the lower list and click OK.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


60 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 48. Logic Block Input / Output Selection


System Parameters
When in system parameters data type mode, the following system parameters can be selected for display
in the graph areas through the drop down list at the top of the graph.
• AVR Control Signal • PF Regulator Control Signal
• AVR Error Signal • PSS Filtered Mechanical Power
• Cross Current Compensation • PSS Final Output
• Droop Compensation • PSS Integral Mechanical Power
• Exciter Field Current • PSS Lead-Lag #1
• Exciter Field Voltage • PSS Lead-Lag #2
• Firing Command • PSS Lead-Lag #3
• GCL Controller Output • PSS Lead-Lag #4
• Generator Apparent Power • PSS Post-Limit Output
• Generator Frequency (Hz) • PSS Power HP #1
• Generator Line Current • PSS Ramp Tracked Mechanical Power
• Generator Power Factor • PSS Speed
• Generator Reactive Power • PSS Speed HP #1
• Generator Real Power • PSS Synthesized Speed
• Generator Terminal Voltage • PSS Torsional Filter #1
• HXL Controller Output • PSS Torsional Filter #2
• INST Controller Output • PSS Washed Out Power
• Line Drop Compensation • PSS Washed Out Speed
• Main Field Current • Regulator PID Derivative State
• Main Field Voltage • Regulator PID Error
• Manual Control Signal • Regulator PID Integrator State
• Manual Error Signal • Regulator PID Output
• MEL Controller Output • Test Signal
• MFEL Controller Output • UEL Controller Output
• OEL Controller 00 Output • UVL Controller Output
• OEL Controller 01 Output • VAR Error Signal
• OVL Controller Output • VAR Regulator Control Signal
• PF Error Signal • VARL Controller Output

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 61

RTM Options
To display the options menu click the Options button and select Display Options from the drop down list.
Both tabs of the options menu are displayed in Figure 49.
• Stack / Tile: These settings arrange the graph windows in stacks, tiles, or a mix of the two.
• Number of graphs: The number of graphs to be displayed is entered here with a maximum of
six.
• Graph Height: The height, in pixels, of all displayed graphs is entered here.
• Black Backgrounds: This option changes the background of all displayed graphs to black.
• Sync Graph Scrolling: When the checkbox is checked, the graphs are all set to the same
position on the X-axis and they scroll simultaneously when one of the graphs is scrolled.
• Set X axis Range: This function sets the graphs to display data within a window of time,
specified by the user. The user-specified values are in seconds. The left field is the starting time
and the right field is the ending time, so the left field value cannot be greater than the right field
value.

Figure 49. RTM Options Window

Right-Click Options
Table 13 describes the list of options that appears upon right-clicking in the graph area.
Table 13. RTM Graph, Right-Click Options
Command Description
Copy Copy the image of the graph to the clipboard
Save As… Save the image of the graph as a .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, .bmp
Page Setup… Set up the printing options
Print… Print the graph
UnZoom Reset the zoom
Undo All Reset the zoom and pan position to the original state
Export Data Export the graph data as a .txt file
Cursors Options for Goto Cursor 1 & 2 and Move Cursor 1 & 2 into View
Lines Display Data Points, Show Point Values, Interpolated, Smooth, Step

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


62 9411300990 Rev D

Command Description
Format Toggle Background Color, Show Grid Lines, X Axis Autofit
Set X Scale Scaling Options, Manual or Automatic, Minimum, Maximum
Set Y Scale Scaling Options, Manual or Automatic, Minimum, Maximum
Rolling the mouse wheel up or down when the cursor is hovering over the graph area causes the view to
zoom in or out.

Metering
BESTCOMS™Pro metering screens are organized according to the functions and parameters monitored.
Many metering screens contain a Help button which can be clicked to obtain additional information about
the metered parameters.

Control Panel
The Control Panel window, Figure 50, displays the status of exciter breakers, auto/manual mode,
setpoints, pre-positions, VAR mode, PF mode, local/remote control, alarm, PSS, voltage matching,
automatic synchronizer, simulation, and null balance. Control buttons are provided for auto, manual, VAR,
and PF modes. These controls allow the user to enable modes, raise and lower setpoints, and apply pre-
position setpoints. Status indicators are gray when FALSE and green when TRUE.

Figure 50. Control Panel Window

Sync Panel
The purpose of the sync panel, Figure 51, is to display the synchronization status of the generator and
the bus. Slip Frequency (Hertz), Slip Angle, and Voltage Difference are metered. Right-clicking in the
graph area displays options for saving, printing, and zoom controls.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 63

Figure 51. Sync Panel Window with Settings Panel Open

Generator
The Generator window displays the voltage, current, MW, MVAR, MVA, power factor, and frequency. See
Figure 52.

Figure 52. Generator Metering Window

Main Field
The Main Field window displays voltage, current, temperature, resistance, minimum field-to-ground
resistance, and maximum field-to-ground resistance. See Figure 53.

Figure 53. Main Field Metering Window

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


64 9411300990 Rev D

Exciter Field
The Exciter Field window displays voltage, current, temperature, resistance, minimum field-to-ground
resistance, and maximum field-to-ground resistance.

Figure 54. Exciter Field Metering Window

Adjuster
The Adjuster window displays the reference, position, and error of ac, manual, VAR, and PF.
Automatic/Manual Balance and Tracker Error are also displayed. See Figure 55.

Figure 55. Adjuster Metering Window

GSU Transformer
The GSU Transformer window displays voltage, current, MW, MVAR, MVA, power factor, and frequency.
See Figure 56.

Figure 56. GSU Transformer Metering Window

Limiter
The Limiter window displays the status of all protective limiting. See Figure 57.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 65

Figure 57. Limiter Metering Window

PPT
The PPT window displays voltage, primary current, secondary current, average temperature, and phase
temperature. See Figure 58.

Figure 58. PPT Metering Window

Real Time Clock


Time and date settings can be made on the Real Time Clock screen by clicking the Edit button on the
Real Time Clock screen. The Real Time Clock is shown in Figure 59.

Figure 59. Real Time Clock

Other
The Other window displays PT magnitude, PID input, fire command, phase PT difference, phase CT
difference, and User-defined metering signals 1, 2, and 3. See Figure 60.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


66 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 60. Other Window

System Status
The System Status window displays the status of the system breakers, operating modes, PSS, voltage
matching, synchronizer, var controller, PF controller, simulation, and USB. See Figure 61.

Figure 61. System Status Window


Alarms (Status)
The Alarms window, found under the Status category, displays the alarm status of the 41A close/open
failure, field flash failure, phase unbalance, PSS output, main/exciter field to ground, PPT over temp
(high/low), bridge, user-defined alarms, and loss of voltage sensing, regulator/metering PT, AC/DC power
supply, and bridge cooling. See Figure 62.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 67

Figure 62. Alarms Window (Status)

Limiters
The Limiters window displays the limiter status of generator/exciter OEL, INST, MFEL, OVL, UVL, HXL,
VRL, MEL, UEL, GCL, and recalibration inputs. See Figure 63.

Figure 63. Limiters Window

System Trip
The System Trip window displays the trip status of generator/exciter OEL, INST, MFEL, OVL, UVL, HXL,
VRL, MEL, UEL, GCL, field current transducer, de-excitation, crowbar, PPT over temp, emergency stop,
and user-defined trips. See Figure 64.

Figure 64. System Trip Window

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


68 9411300990 Rev D

Transfer
The Transfer window displays the transfer status of generator/exciter OEL, INST, MFEL, OVL, UVL, HXL,
VRL, MEL, UEL, GCL, and LOS to redundant or manual. Transfer to redundant disabled, HMI transfer
disabled, and channel not ready are also displayed. See Figure 65.

Figure 65. Transfer Window


Status Inputs
The Inputs window displays the status of inputs C600 to C623, F1 -, and DIGIN1 to 4. See Figure 66.

Figure 66. Status Inputs Window


Status Outputs
The Outputs window displays the output status of C700 to C715, and DIGOUT 1 to 4. See Figure 67.

Figure 67. Status Outputs Window

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 69

Bridge Status
An overview of power bridge conditions and activity is available on the Bridge Status screen (Figure 68).

Figure 68. Brige Status Metering Screen

In-depth information about a specific bridge is provided on the corresponding screens labeled Bridge 0
through Bridge 15. The Bridge 0 screen is shown in Figure 69.

Figure 69. Detailed Bridge Status Screen

Alarms (Metering)
The Alarms window, found under the Metering category, displays the name, time, status, and date of all
recent alarms. See Figure 70.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


70 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 70. Alarms Window (Metering)

Commissioning
Frequency Response
Frequency response testing functions are available under View Explorer, Commissioning, Analysis,
Frequency Response. Frequency Response screen functions are illustrated in Figure 71 and described in
the following paragraphs.

Figure 71. Frequency Response Window


Read-only frequency response fields (right side of window) indicate the magnitude response, phase
response, and test signal frequency. The magnitude response and phase response corresponds to the
test signal previously applied. The test frequency value reflects the frequency of the test signal currently
being applied.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 71

Caution
Exercise caution when performing frequency response testing on a
generator connected to the grid. Frequencies that are close to the
resonant frequency of the machine or neighboring machines are to be
avoided. Frequencies above 3 Hz may correspond to the lowest shaft
torsional frequencies of a genset. A torsional profile for the machine
should be obtained from the manufacturer and consulted before
conducting any frequency response tests.

Transfer Function
The point in the DECS-2100 logic circuitry where a signal is injected for analysis of magnitude and phase
responses is selectable. Signal points are PSS Comp Frequency, PSS Electric Power, and logic block
inputs/outputs. These signal points are stored in two separate lists. The active list can be toggled by

clicking the Change View/Data Type button ( or ).


The transfer function input and output are selectable from the logic block outputs.
Range
The low frequency of the range is entered into Freq 1, the high frequency of the range in entered into
Freq 2, and the number of steps in between is entered in to Steps.
Magnitude
This is the magnitude of the test signal as a per unit value.
Bode Plotting
Using the File menu a Bode plot (Figure 72) can be saved in, SSE, TXT, or CSV formats. The View menu
contains options for customizing the appearance of data points and grid lines, and cursor behavior. An
image of the magnitude plot or phase plot can be saved in EMF, PNG, GIF, JPG, TIF, or BMP formats by
right-clicking in the graph area and selecting Save Image As. Other options available in the right-click
menu are page setup, printing and scale settings.

Figure 72. Bode Plot Window

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


72 9411300990 Rev D

Options
The Options menu allows selection of Scan High to Low Frequency, Magnitude Threshold, Phase
Threshold, and Repetition Count. See Figure 73.

Figure 73. Frequency Response Options Window

Time Response
Tests should be performed at various load levels to confirm that the input signals are calculated or
measured correctly. Since the PSS function uses compensated terminal frequency in place of speed, the
derived mechanical power signal should be examined carefully to ensure that it does not contain any
components at the electromechanical oscillation frequencies. If such components are present, it indicates
that the frequency compensation is less than ideal, or that the machine inertia value is incorrect.
PSS test signal configuration settings are provided on the Time Response screen shown in Figure 74.
The Time Response window is found under View Explorer, Commissioning, Analysis.
Signal Input
Signal input selections determine the point in the PSS circuitry where the test signal is applied. Test
points include, PSS Comp Frequency, PSS Electric Power and logic block inputs and outputs.

Figure 74. Time Response Window

Auto Tuning
During commissioning, excitation system parameters are not known. These unknown variables
traditionally cause the commissioning process to consume a large amount of time and fuel. With the
development of auto tuning the excitation system parameters are automatically identified and the PID
gains are calculated using well-developed algorithms. Automatically tuning the PID controller greatly
reduces commissioning time and cost. The auto tuning function, Figure 75, is accessed by clicking the
Auto Tune option under View Explorer, Commissioning. This window is enabled when the AUTOTUNE
logic block is added to the logic configuration. For more information on using the auto tune feature see
Programmable Logic.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 73

Figure 75. Auto Tune Window

Simulation
The simulation windows provide an easy way to control all aspects of a simulated gen-set. This window,
Figure 76, is enabled when the SIMCON logic block is added to the configuration. It displays overall
status and controls of the active simulation. All commands contained in the individual simulation windows
can be accessed from this window. For example, if the AC Exciter button is clicked, the AC Exciter
window is displayed allowing easy data entry.

Figure 76. Simulation Window

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


74 9411300990 Rev D

Generator Parameters
This window is enabled when the GENSIM logic block is added to the configuration. See Figure 77.

Figure 77. General Parameters Window


AC Exciter
This window (Figure 78) is enabled when the AC_EXCITER logic block is added to the configuration. See

Figure 78. AC Exciter Window


DC Exciter
This window is enabled when the DC_EXCITER logic block is added to the configuration. See Figure 79.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 75

Figure 79. DC Exciter Window


Diesel Engine
This window is enabled when the DIESEL_ENG logic block is added to the configuration.
See Figure 80.

Figure 80. Diesel Engine Window


Gas Turbine
This window is enabled when the GAS_TURB logic block is added to the configuration.
The following figures show the Gas Turbine window, see Figure 81 for the PID Fuel Speed tab, and
Figure 82 for the Turbine Temp Radiation tab.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


76 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 81. Gas Turbine Window, PID Fuel Speed Tab

Figure 82. Gas Turbine Window, Turbine Temp Radiation Tab

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 77

Hydro Turbine
This window (Figure 83)is enabled when the HYDRO_TURB logic block is added to the configuration.

Figure 83. Hydro Turbine Window


Steam Turbine
This window (Figure 84)is enabled when the STEAM_TURB logic block is added to the configuration.

Figure 84. Steam Turbine


Static Load
This window (Figure 85) is enabled when the GENSIM logic block is added to the configuration.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


78 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 85. Static Load Window


Dynamic Load
This window (Figure 86)is enabled when the GENSIM logic block is added to the configuration.

Figure 86. Dynamic Load Window

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 79

System Parameters
This window (Figure 87) is enabled when the SIMCON logic block is added to the configuration.

Figure 87. System Parameters Window


Step-up Transformer Parameters
This window (Figure 88)is enabled when the SIMCON logic block is added to the configuration.

Figure 88. Step-up Transformer Parameters Window

Reports
Events & Data Loggers
Displays the active event recorders and data loggers. See Figure 89.

Figure 89. Events & Data Loggers Window

Table States
Displays the status of RAM and flash tables. See Figure 90.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


80 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 90. Table States Window

Validation
This window contains a function that lists all logic blocks, and their inputs and outputs, the current version
of firmware is compatible with. This report can be exported to a text (.txt) file and saved to disk. See
Figure 91.

Figure 91. Validation Window

Verify/Resolve
This window contains a function that checks the logic configuration for errors and creates a report. This
report can be exported to a text (.txt) file and saved to disk. See Figure 92.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 81

Figure 92. Verify/Resolve Window

Configuration Differences
This window displays the differences in the file, RAM, and flash configurations. This report can be
exported to a text (.txt) file and saved to disk. See Figure 93.

Figure 93. Configuration Differences Window

Cross Reference Report


This screen (Figure 94)displays a report listing all of the input and output connections of the active logic
blocks.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


82 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 94. Cross Reference Report Window

Alarm History
Displays a history of all alarms. The Tools menu provides options to export, refresh, clear history, and
show all devices. See Figure 95.

Figure 95. Alarm History Window

Settings Explorer
The Settings Explorer is a convenient tool within BESTCOMSPro used to navigate through the various
settings screens. After you connect to a control module, you can use the Settings Explorer to display one
or more of the following windows in the working area of the main window. Different window options
appear depending on the type of connected control module. Each tab displayed to the right upon clicking
BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 83

the Settings Explorer options can be undocked and made into a free floating window. The Settings

Explorer panel can be hidden via the View drop down button on the toolbar. The ‘x’ button hides
the Settings Explorer and the thumbtack icon allows it to be docked. A docked screen is viewed by
hovering the mouse pointer over the docked screen.

Settings Explorer Windows


The window options that are available to an excitation control module (ECM-2) differ from those available
to a bridge control module (BCM). Table 14 lists the windows available to the specific control modules.
Table 14. Control Module Settings Explorer Window Availability
Window ECM-2 BCM
General Settings
Controller Settings
Modbus Settings ●
Clock Settings ● ●
COMPort Settings ● ●
Ethernet Settings ●
Device Security Settings
Password Settings ● ●
Logon Password ●
Monitor View Setup ● ●
Data Recording Setup ●
Block Settings (The available logic blocks differ between the
ECM-2 and the BCM, see Basler Electric Instruction Manual ● ●
9411300991.)
PSS (All) ●
Alarms Configuration ● ●

Controller Settings
Modbus Settings
View or change Modbus connection settings. (ECM-2 only) See Figure 96.

Figure 96. Modbus Settings Window

Clock Settings
View and change controller time zone, daylight savings time, and time priority. See Figure 97.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


84 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 97. Clock Settings

COM Port Settings


View and change COM port baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits, and mode. See Figure 98.

Figure 98. COMPort Settings Window

Ethernet Settings
View and change Ethernet connection settings. (ECM-2 only) See Figure 99.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 85

Figure 99. Ethernet Settings Window

Device Security Settings


Password Settings
Change the passwords for the different security levels. See Figure 100.

Figure 100. Password Settings Window

Logon Password
Set a device password. See Figure 101.

Figure 101. Logon Password Window

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


86 9411300990 Rev D

Monitor View Setup


This screen is used to add or edit memory location monitors. See Figure 102. For information on setting
up monitor views see Programmable Logic in this chapter.

Figure 102. Monitor View Setup

Data Recording Setup


Data recording setup is divided between data logging functions (Figure 103) and event recorder blocks
(Figure 104).

Figure 103. Data Recording Setup, Data Logger

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 87

Figure 104. Data Recording Setup, Event Recorder

Block Settings
View and change user description, execution cycles, and assignments of a specific active logic block in
File and RAM. Block settings for flash are view only. In Figure 105, the settings for logic block OR#24 are
shown.

Figure 105. Block Settings Window

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


88 9411300990 Rev D

PSS
Control
Enable/disable control and monitor the PSS supervisory functions in File, RAM, and Flash. See Figure
106.

Figure 106. PSS, Control Window

Dual Paths
Control the PSS primary and secondary frequency, power washout, low pass, ramp tracking, and
intermediate lag in File, RAM, and Flash. See Figure 107.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 89

Figure 107. PSS, Dual Paths Window

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


90 9411300990 Rev D

Main Filters
Control the PSS primary and secondary torsional and lead lag filters in File, RAM, and Flash.
See Figure 108.

Figure 108. PSS, Main Filters Window

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 91

Limiters
Control the PSS primary and secondary output limiting, ramp limit, low pass, and stabilizer gain in File,
RAM, and Flash. See Figure 109.

Figure 109. PSS, Limiters Window

Alarms Configuration
Enable or disable an alarm’s ability to create an alarm notification. The alarm still appears in the alarms
window. See Figure 110.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


92 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 110. Alarms Configuration Window

Menu and Toolbar Commands


Table 15 describes all of the main menu and toolbar commands found in BESTCOMSPro.
Table 15. Menu and Toolbar Commands
Min. Security
Menu Item Description
Level Required
File
Connect… Opens the connections window. 1
Bridge Connect... Opens the Bridge Connect window. Choose from a list 1
of bridges to connect to the controller.
Open Configuration… Opens a saved configuration file. 1
Close Closes the active configuration file. 1
Save Saves the active configuration file. 2
Save As... Saves the active configuration file with a different 2
name.
Data Logger Open Data Logger File or Import Data from Text. 1
Event Recorder Open Event Recorder File or Import Event from Text. 1
SSE Plot Open SSE Plot from File or Import SSE Plot from 1
Text.
Page Setup Opens printer settings window. 1
Print Preview Preview a configuration file printout. 1
Print... Send a configuration file to a printer. 1
Preferences Opens the preferences window. 1
Recent Files View Recently Opened Files or Clear recent Files list. 1

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 93

Min. Security
Menu Item Description
Level Required
Exit Exit BESTCOMSPro 1
Edit
Export Config Save configuration differences in a text file. 1
Differences...
View
Alarms Opens the alarms window. View all recent alarms. 1
Controller
Memory I/O… Copy to File or Insert from File. 5
Print Controller Choose any current RAM, flash, or file data to print. 1
Purchase Blocks Choose logic blocks to be purchased from Basler 2
Electric.
Set State… Opens the Set Run State window. Choose the desired 2
state of the controller.
Save Current State... Saves the current state of the controller to be the 2
default state of the controller on power-up.
Configurations
Add Block… Opens the Add Block window. Choose from a list of 2
logic blocks to add.
Remove Block… Opens a Remove Block window. Choose from a list of 2
logic blocks to remove.
Configure Blocks… Opens the Configure Blocks window. Choose from a 2
list of logic blocks to configure.
Copy File to RAM… Copy data in a configuration file to RAM. 2
Copy RAM to File… Copy configuration data in RAM to a configuration file. 2
Copy RAM to Flash… Copy configuration data in RAM to flash memory. 2
Copy Flash to RAM… Copy configuration data in flash memory to RAM. 1
Copy Flash to File… Copy configuration data in flash memory to a 2
configuration file.
Input Assignments Save to File, Import into Existing Config, Import into 1
New Config.
Set Initials Change user’s initials without restarting 1
BESTCOMSPro.
User Descriptions Export to File, Import form File. 1
User Definitions Add / Edit…, Export to File, Import to File. 1
Associate File... Replace the current file configuration with a loaded file 2
configuration.
Tools
Check for Updates Check for the latest BESTCOMSPro updates via the 1
internet.
Select Language Opens the Select Language window. 1
Set Security Level Change the current security level. Password required. 1
Firmware Upload Upload a firmware file to the ECM-2. 4

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


94 9411300990 Rev D

Min. Security
Menu Item Description
Level Required
Compact RAM Compacts the RAM Diagram. 2
Diagram
Window
Cascade All Cascade all configuration file windows. 1
Tile Tile configuration file windows horizontally or 1
vertically.
Maximize All Maximize all configuration file windows. 1
Close All Close all configuration file windows. 1
Help
BESTCOMSPro Help Opens the BESTCOMSPro Help index. 1
About BESTCOMSPro Displays General, Detailed Build, and System 1
Information.
Activate Enter or request an activation key. 1
BESTCOMSPro
Remove Activation Removes all activation keys for this product. 1
Keys
Block Help All logic block summaries and drawings. 1
Toolbar Commands
Show or hide the view and settings explorers. Open or 1
View Drop save workspaces.
down List
Opens the connections window. 1
Connect
Opens a saved configuration file. 1
Open
Closes the active configuration file and/or connection. 1
Close
Saves the active configuration file. 1
Save
Opens the preferences window. 1
Preferences
Opens the Add Block window. Choose from a list of 1
Add Block logic blocks to add.
Opens the Remove Block window. Choose from a list 1
Remove Block of logic blocks to remove.
Opens the Set Run State window. Choose the desired 1
Set State state of the controller.
Reloads the active configuration. 1
Reload the
configuration
Opens the Alarms window. Recent alarms are listed. 1
Alarms
Opens the Configuration Differences window. 1
Compare
Configurations

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 95

Security Levels
BESTCOMSPro security levels apply to the RAM configuration. You can edit any information in the
configuration file regardless of your security level. Your security level is checked when you download from
the configuration file to RAM, or when you directly edit RAM.
The security levels are described below in Table 16.
Table 16. Security Level Definitions

Security Levels Definition

View Only Allows viewing of all information in RAM but no ability to save
changes. No password is needed and is not shown.

Tune Configuration Allows changing of input assignments.

Change Configuration Allows adding and removing blocks, purchasing blocks, and
changing the type of input.

COE (Custom Order


Enables additional functions for performing system upgrades.
Engineer)

Administrator Allows access to individual memory locations.

The View Only level does not require a password. All other security levels are password protected.
A default security level is provided when BESTCOMSPro is initially activated. If you know the associated
password, you can change your security level after you connect to a controller using the Set Security
Level command. Users at a higher level can change the password for their security level or lower. If you
forget your password, call Basler Electric to get a temporary activation key with a higher security level
which can be used to reset the passwords.

Setting Security Level Passwords


Use the Password Settings window to change the password of one or more security levels for any or all
connected controllers. You can change the password of your current security level or a lower security
level.
Note: Be careful when changing passwords because the old password cannot be recovered after you set
a new one. Also, passwords are not user-specific. The same password applies to all users of the security
level.
To set security passwords:
• In the Settings Explorer, choose General Settings, Device Security Settings, Password Settings.
• Your current security level is selected in the list.
• Select a security level to change its password.
• Type the new password for the selected security level in the Password and Confirm fields.
• Click Set Password. A confirmation dialog tells you the password is saved.
• To change the password for another level, repeat Steps 2-6.

Changing Security Levels


Use the Set Security Level command to change your current security level. You must enter the
associated password to change to a security level that is higher than your current level.
• Choose Set Security Level from the Tools menu.
• Select a security level and, if the level is higher than your current level, enter the associated
password.
• Click OK and BESTCOMSPro changes your security level.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


96 9411300990 Rev D

Logic Overview
BESTCOMSPro Programmable Logic is a programming method used for managing the input, output,
control, monitoring, and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric's DECS-2100 System. The DECS-2100
has multiple, self-contained logic blocks that have all of the inputs and outputs of its discrete component
counterpart. Each independent logic block interacts with control inputs and hardware outputs based on
logic variables defined in BESTCOMSPro. Configurations entered and saved in the DECS-2100 system's
nonvolatile memory integrate (electronically wire) the selected or enabled control blocks with control
inputs and hardware outputs. A group of connected functions, defining the logic of the DECS-2100, is
called a logic configuration. Using BESTCOMSPro programmable logic is analogous to physically
attaching wire between discrete DECS-2100 terminals. For a detailed explanation of BESTCOMSPro
logic see Programmable Logic in this chapter.

Logic Block
A logic block is a block of code that represents a component or function in a circuit. Logic blocks can be
simple logic gates, latches, and timers or complex function modules. For a full list of available logic blocks
for the DECS-2100 with function summaries and diagrams, see Basler Electric Instruction Manual
9411300991.

Execution Strategy
The execution strategy, Figure 111, defines when a block executes in relation to all other blocks, the time
slots in which the execution takes place, and the executions per cycle. Each cycle consists of 16
divisions. A logic block can execute 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 times per cycle.

Figure 111. Execution Strategy Window

Logic Configuration
A configuration file stores the programmable logic block information and all controller settings. It is used
to define new configurations before putting them into operation. When you are ready to put the
configuration into operation, download from the configuration file to the RAM of the controller. If the
controller is not in the resolved state when you try to download, BESTCOMSPro asks if you want to set
the state to resolved. Your security level is also checked at the time of download. Any level user can edit
the configuration file, but only users with the appropriate security level can download the information to
RAM.
RAM - This is the configuration information that is to be executed. After you download from the
configuration file, the controller state is resolved. Set the state to execute blocks to begin executing the
new RAM values. Then monitor and fine tune the configuration as needed.
Flash memory - Flash memory is the permanent memory of the controller. Unlike RAM, Flash memory is
not lost if the power goes off. Therefore, you save from RAM to Flash in order to retain information in the
event of a power outage or re-cycle. At power-up, the Flash configuration replaces the RAM
configuration. You cannot directly edit any information in Flash memory.

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 97

To Save Configurations Files


• Click File, Save As…
• Name the file, and click Save.
To Open Configuration Files
• Click File, Open Configuration.
• Select the file to be opened, and click Open.
To copy a configuration to File, RAM, or Flash
Click Configurations, and click the appropriate command from the pull down menu.
See Figure 112.

Figure 112. Copy Configuration to File, RAM, or Flash

Data Loggers and Event Recorders


This is an overview of data loggers and event recorders. For information on setting up data loggers and
event recorders, see Programmable Logic.

Data Logger
A data logger is a special function block that takes continuous samples of data. The inputs to this block
accept the outputs from other blocks that are to be monitored. The time interval, at which the data logger
samples the data, is user-defined. Once a data logger is set up and put into execution, it is always
recording data, up to 12 channels of selected parameters. You choose when to view the data. The data
logger graph is shown in Figure 113.

Event Recorder
An event recorder is a special function block that records the output values related to an event. The
trigger that sets off the event and the signals to be recorded are user-defined. When the event recorder is
enabled, it starts monitoring for an occurrence of the trigger. When the trigger occurs, the event recorder
records the event and automatically displays the attentions indicator in BESTCOMSPro to allow you to
upload and view the data.
The two types of triggers are logic and float. For the logic type, you define whether a true or false value
for a specific output triggers the event. For the float type, the event is triggered if the value of a specific
output falls outside a minimum and maximum value that you define. The event recorder saves both pre-
trigger and post-trigger data. You specify a time interval for sampling the data and how many samples
you want taken at each interval for pre-trigger and total samples. The sampling rate, total number of
samples per channel, number of total samples that are pre-trigger, and number of channels to record (up
to 8) are all user-defined for the four available blocks.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


98 9411300990 Rev D

Figure 113. Data Logger Graph

Alarms
The controller activates an alarm to alert you to a condition that requires your attention.

Alarm Notifications
When an alarm condition occurs an Active Alarms notification appears at the upper right corner of the
configuration window as shown in Figure 114. Click the Active Alarms button to view the alarms window.

Figure 114. Alarm Notification

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 99

Viewing Alarms

Click the Alarms command from the View menu or the button on the toolbar.
The alarms window appears, showing all recent alarms.

Alarms Configuration Window


Alarm notifications may need to be enabled or disabled depending on the current application. A complete
list of the alarms can be found in the Settings explorer, Alarms Configurations window. Each entry has a
check box which toggles the enabled or disabled state of the alarm notification. When a disabled alarm
notification is triggered it still appears in the alarms window, but there is no notification.

Event and Alarm History Recorder (Sequence of Events)


In View Explorer, Reports, Click Alarm History. A window containing the alarm history and sequence of
events is displayed (Figure 115). The Alarm History Tools menu contains options for refreshing or
exporting data. Alarms are only added to the application database when the Save Alarm History
checkbox is checked in the General tab of the Preferences dialog.

Figure 115. Alarm History Window

BESTspace™
BESTspace™ customizable workspaces can be set to fit your specific application needs. Any number of
different workspaces can be saved including a default workspace that will load when BESTCOMS™Pro is
started. (The workspace is the current position, size, and state of all windows that are currently open.)
You can save and load workspaces to quickly and easily switch between preferred window layouts and
settings. This is especially useful for multiple users of the same PC or for quickly switching between
monitoring and configuration tuning tasks. A custom workspace can also be saved as the default
workspace that is loaded when a connection is made to the associated controller or its configuration file is
loaded.
BESTspace™ controls are accessed through the View button on the lower toolbar.

BESTCOMS™Pro Updates
Over time, enhancements may be added to improve BESTCOMS™Pro functionality. Checking for
software updates can be done through BESTCOMS™Pro on a PC with an internet connection. Checks
for updates can be made manually or automatically.

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


100 9411300990 Rev D

A manual check for updates can be made through the toolbar by selecting Help, Check for Updates.
Automatic checks for updates can be enabled and configured through the toolbar by selecting, Help,
Check for Update Settings. This action accesses the Check for Updates User Settings screen (Figure
116) which provides selection of enabling automatic updates, the frequency of checking for updates, and
whether the update inquiries are anonymous.

Figure 116. Help Menu: Check for Update Settings

Firmware Upgrades

Caution
When ECM-2 firmware is updated, default settings are loaded into the
ECM-2, reports and events are cleared, and the ECM-2 reboots.
BESTCOMSPro can be used to download configuration settings and
save the settings in a file so that they can be restored after updating
firmware.

The firmware upgrade option is available only with security level 4 or higher. If you have obtained a
package file containing an updated firmware file for your device, you can upload it by selecting Firmware
Upgrade from the Tools pull-down menu on the main screen in BESTCOMSPro. The Basler Electric
Device Package Uploader screen appears. See Figure 117.

Figure 117. Basler Electric Device Package Uploader

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 101

Use the Open button to browse for the device file that you obtained from Basler Electric. Place a
checkmark next to the file you want to upload. Click the Upload button. The ECM-2 reboots automatically
after the firmware upload is complete.

Plug-Ins for BESTCOMS™Pro


When you connect to a control module, or load a configuration file, the appropriate plug-in loads
automatically. The following plug-ins are currently available.
• ECS2100
• DECS-2100

ECM-2 BESTCOMS™Pro Software


102 9411300990 Rev D

BESTCOMS™Pro Software ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 103

Commissioning
This publication serves as a guide for placing a DECS-2100 excitation system into service for the first
time. In this publication, references are made to a variety of systems (static, brushless, rotating exciter)
with a variety of options. These references are generic and some referenced options may not apply to a
particular system. It is essential that the site-specific schematics are obtained and consulted before
proceeding with any commissioning procedures.

Safety

Warning!

Components within the excitation system carry lethal levels of voltage.


Personal injury or death may result if contact is made with these
components. Consulting the system drawings will reveal these
hazardous areas/components. All connections should be assumed to
be live and dangerous until proven otherwise.

When working with the excitation system, every precaution must be taken to ensure that all high voltages
are isolated and avoided by test personnel. High voltages are present within the equipment enclosures;
the magnitude of these voltages depends upon the ratings of the particular system. Opening the sources
(such as disconnecting the field circuit breaker) does not completely eliminate the possibility of high
voltages being present. As long as the machine is physically connected to the system, there is a
possibility that a safety hazard exists. In addition to the presence of machine terminal voltage at the
excitation transformer, there may be other sources of power entering the enclosure. These power sources
include the dc control power and ac station power used to supply various devices. Field voltage will be
present at the ground detector power source. The generator field ground detector must be disconnected
when servicing the excitation system. Because the ground detector input supply is usually a separate 120
Vac, both the ac power bus and dc field bus may be back fed from this device with 120 Vdc.

Test Equipment

Warning!

Most oscilloscopes have a common connection for all inputs (the


oscilloscope case). When making multiple connections to an
oscilloscope, ensure that there is no short circuit on the common
connection. Isolation transformers may be required. Note that when
the oscilloscope case is isolated from ground, potential may be
present on the case. Touching the oscilloscope case may result in
electrical shock.

The following equipment is required for testing of the excitation equipment as part of the commissioning
process.
• Three-phase power source with the proper voltage, frequency, and capacity to energize the
power bridge
• Suitable load for the power bridge (an inductive load is highly recommended)
• Two-channel oscilloscope with isolated inputs or isolation amplifier
• Oscilloscope current probe for measurement of SCR gate current
• Oscilloscope differential voltage probe (if inputs are not isolated)
• Multimeter, 20 kΩ/V or better
• Phase angle meter (oscilloscope may be substituted)
ECM-2 0BCommissioning
104 9411300990 Rev D

• Power sources for transducer calibration:


o 120 Vac, three-phase, 1 Aac, <0.1% accuracy
o 20 Vac, three-phase, 7.5 Aac, <0.1% accuracy
o 200 mVdc, <0.1% accuracy
o 0–500 Vdc, 1 Adc, <0.1%
• 200 Ω, 1 W potentiometer
• 1 MΩ, 2W potentiometer
• 1 kΩ, ¼ W resistor

Optional Equipment
• Phase sequence meter
• Chart recorder, two element with voltage balancing unit

Procedures Outline
Testing procedures are performed with the machine at rest and running—offline and online.
* These steps must be done or supervised by a service engineer using BESTCOMS™Pro software.
† Settings applied in these steps are the responsibility of the user or his hired consultant.

Machine Idle
1. Reconcile all external wiring with the connections shown on the system schematic diagrams.
2. Verify all auxiliary power circuits.
3. If a power potential transformer (PPT) is used, verify the transformer phasing. If a permanent magnet
generator (PMG) is used, check the phase rotation on the turning gear.
4. Energize the system modules and circuit boards and verify that the application firmware is the proper
version.∗
5. Check the scale and offset of all transducers using simulated sources.∗
6. Verify the operation of all relays, breakers, and control switches.
7. Check the exciter firing control and power bridges.
8. Check all adjusters, followers, regulators, and controllers using simulated sources.†
9. Confirm the operation of all limiting and protection functions using simulated sources. Adjust the
pickup and time delay settings according to the site/application requirements.∗†
10. Test the monitoring functions using simulated sources.∗†
11. Reconnect PPT or PMG (if original source was not used to check power bridge function).

Machine Running at Rated Speed, Generator Breaker Open


1. If a PMG is used, verify the PMG voltage magnitude and phase rotation.
2. Check the excitation system control offline.
3. Check system stability offline (bump test).

Machine Running at Rated Speed, Generator Breaker Closed


1. Ensure that the polarity and phase angle of the machine current signals are correct
2. If var or power factor control is used, check the system with controller enabled.
3. Check for correct setting and stability of various limiters using actual machine signals. Test settings or
software-injected test offsets may be used if necessary.∗†

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 105

4. Verify power system stabilizer setup and operation.∗†


5. Check the final configuration of the system as it operates on the electrical system.†

Commissioning Procedures
Preparation
All service personnel should familiarize themselves with all site requirements and the associated
equipment before performing any testing.

Safety
For safety, the ground detector should be disabled and power should be removed from the enclosure
heaters while working in the unit. The field leads should be lifted when connected to a dummy load. When
supplying the power bridge from a test power source, the PPT or PMG leads should be lifted.
Connections between the shunt and field current transducer should be removed when a test source is
used. Remember to reconnect all circuits prior to spinning the generator.

Tracking Your Progress


A copy of the system schematic diagrams should be used as a checklist for tested circuits. As circuits are
tested, they can be crossed off. A system may contain circuits not covered here. Consult with the service
engineer for the proper procedures for testing these circuits.

Multiple Channels
Calibration must be performed on all channels of a system. Values obtained for a channel must be as
close as possible to the corresponding values for the other channels. A procedure should be conducted
simultaneously for all channels.

Preventing Trips
Disable all trip commands to avoid undesired trips. Remember to enable the trip commands prior to
spinning the generator.

External Wiring
A point-to-point check of all wiring connections, for continuity and proper polarity, should be performed.
Improper wiring or phasing can cause incorrect operation of the limiters and protection functions.

Auxiliary Power Circuits


Verify proper operation of all enclosure lights receptacles, thermostats, and heaters.

Power Source Phasing

Caution
Failure to verify the PPT connections, winding polarity, and the phase
sequence of all voltages may result in equipment malfunction and
damage.

Inspect the PPT connections and polarity. Confirm that the PPT primary connections provide a positive
phase sequence. Table 17 lists the typical terminal designations for the PPT and power bridge along with
the connections needed for positive, in-phase, sequence rotation.

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
106 9411300990 Rev D

Table 17. Typical Terminal Designations


A-Phase B-Phase C-Phase
PPT Primary H1 H2 H3
PPT Secondary X1 X2 X3
Power Bridge Input PS1 PS2 PS3

The actual terminal nomenclature may vary according to the equipment used and site-specific
conventions. The key consideration for these connections is that the phase sequence of the three-phase
supply to ac isolation transducers and power bridge is positive when the 41 device is closed. If the
machine phase sequence is different from that shown on the excitation schematic, the cause must be
determined and corrected before the equipment is energized.

Firmware Verification
Verify that the output of the black-start power supply (fed by 125 Vdc control power) is 24 Vdc, ±3Vdc.
With a PC operating BESTCOMSPro software, connect to the ECM-2 and note the firmware version of the
module. Also note the version of the display panel.
Each step in the following procedure should be performed on all channels before continuing to the next
step. This practice will yield results with minimal differences between channels.
Establish communication between the ECM-2 and a PC operating BESTCOMSPro before calibrating the
input transducers.

Transducer Scale and Offset

Note
Each step in the following procedure should be performed on all
channels before continuing to the next step. This practice will yield
results with minimal differences between channels.
Establish communication between the ECM-2 and a PC operating
BESTCOMSPro before calibrating the input transducers.

Set the PT and CT inputs to zero by shorting the inputs at their respective input switches. Set the scales
of the SIGIN block corresponding to the PT and CT inputs to 1. Verify that the associated outputs of the
SIGIN block indicate that each PT and CT signal is close to zero (±0.0018). If they are not, use the
appropriate offset constant to make the output of each input close to zero. (Increase/decrease the offset
in increments of 0.5.) Remove all short-circuits from the PT and CT inputs.
1. Connect the regulator PT switches to a three-phase voltage source with a magnitude, frequency, and
phase sequence equal to the PT secondary voltage when the generator output is at its rated value.
Verify that the MAGNITUDE1 output of the PTCTTRN block is 1.000, ±0.0009. If it is not, use the
appropriate SIGIN block SIGIN_CH##_SCALE constants to make the output of the block equal to
1.000, ±0.0009. Set all three SIGIN block input constants (SIGIN_CH##_SCALE) to the same value
for a three-phase input.
2. Run a transfer curve with the input voltages of 90%, 110%, and 130% of the generator line voltage.
The results should be linear.
3. Connect the metering PT switches to a three-phase voltage with a magnitude, frequency, and phase
sequence equal to the PT secondary voltage when the generator output is at its rated value. Verify
that the MAGNITUDE2 output of the PTCTTRN block is 1.000, ±0.009. If it is not, use the appropriate
SIGIN block SIGIN_CH##_SCALE constants to make the output of the block equal to 1.000, ±0.0009.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 107

Set all three SIGIN block input constants (SIGIN_CH##_SCALE) to the same value for a three-phase
input.
4. Run a transfer curve with the input voltage set to simulate 90%, 110%, and 130% of the generator
line voltage. The results should be linear.
5. Temporarily adjust the CONFIG parameter of the PTCTTRN block by adding 8 hex to the present
value (configures the PTCTTRN for operation with a single CT input). Connect each CT switch to a
source of ac current equal in magnitude, frequency, phase sequence, and polarity to the CT
secondary currents when the generator output is at its rated value, verify that the CTMAGNITUDE
output of the PTCTTRN block is 1.000, ±0.005. If it not use the appropriate SIGIN block
SIGIN_CH##_SCALE constant associated with the phase-A CT input to make the output of the block
equal to 1.000, ±0.05. (Typically, phase-A CT constant is SIGIN_CH04_SCALE.)
6. Temporarily connect the CTPHASEA input of the PTCTTRN block to the SIGIN channel associated
with the phase-B CT. With the source still connected to each CT switch set equal in magnitude,
frequency, phase sequence, and polarity to the CT secondary currents when the generator output is
at its rated value, verify that the CTMAGNITUDE output of the PTCTTRN block is 1.000, ±0.005. If it
not use the appropriate SIGIN block SIGIN_CH##_SCALE constant associated with the phase-B CT
input to make the output of the block equal to 1.000, ±0.05. (Typically, phase-B CT constant is
SIGIN_CH05_SCALE.)
7. Temporarily connect the CTPHASEA input of the PTCTTRN block to the SIGIN channel associated
with the phase-C CT. With the source still connected to each CT switch set equal in magnitude,
frequency, phase sequence, and polarity to the CT secondary currents when the generator output is
at its rated value, verify that the CTMAGNITUDE output of the PTCTTRN block is 1.000, ±0.005. If it
not use the appropriate SIGIN block SIGIN_CH##_SCALE constant associated with the phase-C CT
input to make the output of the block equal to 1.000, ±0.05. (Typically, phase-C CT constant is
SIGIN_CH06_SCALE.)
8. Return the CTPHASEA input of the PTCTTRN block to its original value (the SIGIN channel
associated with the phase-A CT). Return the CONFIG parameter of the PTCTTRN block to its original
value. With the source still connected to each CT switch set equal in magnitude, frequency, phase
sequence, and polarity to the CT secondary currents when the generator output is at its rated value,
verify that the CTMAGNITUDE output of the PTCTTRN block is 1.000, ±0.005. If it not use the
appropriate SIGIN block SIGIN_CH##_SCALE constants to make the output of the block equal to
1.000, ±0.05. (Typically, these constants are SIGIN_CH04_SCALE, SIGIN_CH05_SCALE, and
SIGIN_CH06_SCALE.) Scale all three SIGIN_CH##_SCALE proportionally for a three-phase input.
9. Run a transfer curve with the CT input current at 1 Aac, 2 Aac, 3 Aac, and 4 Aac. The results should
be linear.
10. Apply values to the PT and CT inputs that simulate the generator at rated conditions. Use
BESTCOMSPro to capture an event that records the instantaneous voltage and current inputs. Verify
that the phasing is correct. Confirm on the display panel that the line voltage, line current, megawatts,
megavars, and power factor read correctly on all screens.
11. If the LOS2_SENS block is utilized, verify proper assignment of the CH_MET_VA thru CH_IC
parameters. With the appropriate values of PT and CT inputs to simulate the generator at rated
conditions applied, verify that the SEQ_V1 and SEQ_I1 outputs of the LOS2_SENS block are
1.00±.009 and that the SEQ_V2 and SEQ_I2 outputs are less than 0.100.

Note
For IT transducers, pin 19 is positive with respect to pin 20 and pin 21
is positive with respect to pin 22.

12. Remove the appropriate fuse and short the connections to the Phase AB line transducer (ALXDM).
Set the PPT_SCALEA parameter of the FLDSCALE block to 1. Verify that PPT_PTA output of the

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
108 9411300990 Rev D

FLDSCALE block is 0 counts, ±2 counts. If it is not, adjust the PPT_OFFSETA parameter so that the
output is at 0, ±2 counts.
Connect the ac line transducer input (pins J19 and J20) to a dc voltage equal to the peak value of the
line-to-line voltage applied to the power bridges (√2 * Vrms). Verify that the PPT_PTA output is 1.000,
±0.0009. If it is not, adjust the PPT_SCALEA parameter of the FLDSCALE block until the PPT_PPA
output is 1.000, ±0.0009.
13. Remove the appropriate fuse and short the connections to the Phase BC line transducer (ALXDM).
Set the PPT_SCALEB parameter of the FLDSCALE block to 1. Verify that PPT_PTB output of the
FLDSCALE block is 0 counts, ±2 counts. If it is not, adjust the PPT_OFFSETB parameter so that the
output is at 0, ±2 counts.
Connect the ac line transducer input (pins J21 and J22) to a dc voltage equal to the peak value of the
line-to-line voltage applied to the power bridges (√2 * Vrms). Verify that the PPT_PTB output is 1.000,
±0.0009. If it is not, adjust the PPT_SCALEB parameter of the FLDSCALE block until the PPT_PPB
output is 1.000, ±0.0009.
14. Re-establish all connections and replace all fuses previously removed.
15. Remove the appropriate fuse and short the connection to the field voltage transducer (pins J21 and
J22 of DCXDM). Set the VG_SCALE parameter of the FLDSCALE block to 1. Verify that the
GEN_FLD_VLT output of the FLDSCALE block is at 0, ±2 counts. If it is not, adjust VG_OFFSET
parameter so that the output is at 0, ±2 counts.
16. Remove the short-circuit across the input of the field voltage transducer and apply a dc input equal to
the field voltage at full load. (The full-load field voltage can be calculated by multiplying the full-load
field current by the field resistance at rated operation field temperature, typically 70°C for hydro and
100°C for steam.) Verify that the GEN_FLD_VLT output of the FLDSCALE block is at 1.000, ±0.0009.
If it is not, adjust VG_SCALE so that the output is at 1.000, ±0.0009.
17. Run a transfer curve with the input voltage set to simulate 50%, 100%, and 150% of full-load field
voltage (if possible). All results should be linear.
18. Check the display panel to verify that the field voltage is displayed correctly on all screens.
19. Restore all DCXDM connections and replace the fuse removed in step 15.
20. Disconnect the leads from the output current shunt and short the connections of the field current
transducer (pins J19 and J20 of DCXDM). Set the IG_SCALE parameter of the FLD_SCALE block to
1 and IG_FILTER to 0.00. Verify that the GEN_FLD_CUR output of the FLD_SCALE block is 0, ±2. If
it is not, adjust IG_OFFSET so that the output is 0, ±2.
21. Remove the short circuit across the input of the field current transducer. Connect a millivolts-level
source to the input for the field current transducer (DCXDM). Apply an input that corresponds to the
shunt signal when field current is at full load. Verify that the GEN_FLD_CUR output of the
FLD_SCALE block is 1.000, ±0.0009. If it is not, adjust IG_SCALE so that the output is 1.000,
±0.0009.
22. Run a transfer curve with the input signal set to simulate 50%, 100%, and 200% of full-load field
current. All results should be linear.
23. Check the display panel to verify that the field current is displayed correctly on all screens.
24. Restore all DCXDM connections.
25. If the system contains both generator and exciter field transducers, repeat steps 15 thru 21
substituting EXC_FLD_VLT for GEN_FLD_VLT; EXC_FLD_CUR for GEN_FLD_CUR, VE_### for
VG_###; and IE_### for IG_### in each step.
26. If 4–20mAdc analog inputs are used to measure current, confirm that load resistors are present.
Verify that AD_OFFSET_3 and AD_GAIN_3 of the ALOGDIG block are properly set for channel 1
(per the system drawings and site transducers).
Confirm that AD_OFFSET_4 and AD_GAIN_4 of the ALOGDIG block are properly set for channel 2
(per the system drawings and site transducers).

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 109

If a ground detector is used, channel 3 typically measures leakage to ground and can be configured
later as part of ground detector calibration.
27. If RTD inputs are used, check for proper setting of the following ALOGDIG block parameters:
AD_OFFSET_1, AD_GAIN_1, AD_OFFSET_2, AD_GAIN_2, AD_RTD_KSCALE, and AD_RTD_RZ.
Connect a test resistance in place of an RTD. For a 100 ohm input, the output of ALOGDIG should
indicate 0°C. for a 110 ohm input, the output of ALOGDIG should indicate 25.9°C. If this output
supplies a remote meter, inject signals and verify proper meter indications.
28. If analog outputs are used, refer to the system drawings and check the DIGALOG and DAC_OB
blocks for properly set offsets and scales. If this output supplies a remote meter inject signals and
verify proper meter indications.

Relays, Breakers, and Control Switches


Check the operation of all relays, contactors, cooling fans, circuit breakers, and adjusters. The various
control switches, located locally at system enclosure and remotely at the station operator’s control board,
should be checked also. Operation of all these devices must be in agreement with the system drawings.
Initial checks should be made with the local display panel followed by the control room switches, and then
the distributed control system screens.
For dual-channel systems, this portion of the procedure should be performed first with the main channel
in control. Then, all steps should be repeated with the redundant channel in control.
Connect a three-phase ac voltage source to the regulator PT switches. This source should have the same
magnitude and phase sequence as the PT secondary voltage when the generator output is at the rated
value.
The following steps serve as checks for the more typically used components.
1. Verify operation of a local/remote transfer. With local control, the system enclosure display panel
controls are enabled. With remote control, the control room switches are enabled and the display
panel screen switches on the system enclosure are disabled. Steps 2 through 10 should be
performed in local control and then repeated in remote control. Verify the operation of any local and
remote indicator lights.
2. Verify all aspects of field circuit breaker (41) operation: the 41A-CS close and trip commands, 41AX
relays, and interlocks. When the local 41CS is switch to the trip position, the lockout (86) device
operates immediately, initiating phase back. The 41A device trips about 5 seconds later (after a
software timer expires). Upon a site-supplied emergency trip, the 41A device operates immediately.
Check all 41A, 41AX, and 86 status indicator lights and contacts.
3. Verify operation of automatic/manual mode selections. Verify that the system can be transferred
between automatic and manual modes. Check for proper auto and manual indicator light operation.
4. Check the system for a proper response to a loss of sensing. Confirm that a transfer to manual mode
occurs when the regulator PT and metering PT (if used) voltage decreases below the selected value.
Normally, the system is started in auto mode. Since the PT voltage is low initially, the controls are
defaulted by the loss of sensing function to manual mode. When the PT voltage crosses the
selectable level in a predetermined time, the system transfers back into auto mode.
If metering PTs are used, the system transfers from one set of PTs to the other set when only one set
of PTs is low. Transfer to manual mode occurs when both sets of PTs go low. These scenarios can
be simulated in two ways. The first test simulates a blown fuse by disconnecting a single PT input.
The second test simulates a high-resistance fuse/connection by lowering the PT inputs.
5. While disconnected from the field, test operation of the field flashing circuitry. If included, set 31TD
according to the site requirements (typically 10 seconds). Check the 31 and 31X contacts in the alarm
and annunciator circuits. Ensure that field flashing is terminated when the field current builds up or
when regulator PT voltage is applied.
6. Verify operation of the automatic adjuster. Confirm that the traverse range and pre-position setting
meet the requirements of the application. With the 41A device tripped, the adjuster output is at the

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
110 9411300990 Rev D

ACVLTADJ block soft start bias value (ACADJ_SS_BIAS) and cannot be moved under normal
operation. With 41A closed, the adjuster output can be moved.
To verify the traverse range, set the adjuster at minimum, and apply a PT signal until the ac error
signal reads zero. (A balance meter can be used if dc error is kept at zero.) This is the minimum
setting of the adjuster. With the adjuster set at maximum, apply a PT signal until the ac error signal
reads zero. Both of these settings (ACADJ_MAX and ACADJ_MIN) are selectable with
BESTCOMSPro software. The traverse time is set using ACADJ_SLEW.
7. Verify operation of the manual adjuster. Confirm that the traverse range and pre-position setting meet
the requirements of the application. With the 41A device tripped, the adjuster output is at the
MANADJ block soft start bias value (MANADJ_SS_BIAS) and cannot be moved under normal
operation. With the 41A device closed, the adjuster output can be moved.
To verify the traverse range, set the adjuster at minimum, and vary a simulated current shunt signal
until the dc error reads zero. (A balance meter can be used if ac error is kept at zero.) This is the
minimum setting of the adjuster. With the adjuster set at maximum, apply a simulated current shunt
signal until the dc error signal reads zero. Both of these settings (MANADJ_MAX and MANADJ_MIN)
are selectable with BESTCOMSPro software. The traverse time is set using MANADJ_SLEW.
8. Verify operation of the var control adjuster. Confirm that the traverse range and pre-position setting
meet the requirements of the application. With the 41A device tripped, the adjuster output is at the
VARCONTR block pre-position value (VRC_PP_1) and cannot be moved under normal operation.
With the 41A device closed, the adjuster output can be moved.
To verify the traverse range, set the adjuster at minimum, apply PT and CT signals, and adjust
simulated vars until the var balance signal reads zero. This is the minimum setting of the adjuster.
With the adjuster set at maximum, apply PT and CT signals and adjust the simulated vars until the
var balance signal reads zero. Both of these settings (VRC_MAX and VRC_MIN) are selectable with
BESTCOMSPro software. The traverse time is settable using VRC_SLEW.
9. If used, check operation of the 64 switch and field ground fault detector. Confirm that the ground fault
detector is disabled during field flashing.
10. If used, check operation of the cooling fans and their associated controls
11. Repeat steps 2 through 10 with the remote controls selected.
12. Check any other control features as indicated by the system drawings.

Firing Control and Power Bridges—Generator Not Spinning

Caution
If the excitation transformer is not used and a separate source is
connected to the 41A device, the excitation transformer secondary
connections to the 41A device must be disconnected, taped, and
tagged. Do not energize the excitation transformer secondary with the
test source.
Although starting resistors may be used as a load for this test, a higher
current load (preferably inductive) is preferred. If the rotor field will be
used as part of the load, an additional load resistor should be added in
series with the generator or exciter field. This resistor must be sized to
prevent any damage to the exciter or generator rotor and prevent
overloading of the test power source when the unit is not rotating.
(Current values less than no-load field current can damage the
generator or brushes.) Check with the customer to determine the safe
level of current for the stationary machine.
An idle, powered field must be closely supervised to prevent thermal
damage. Damage to brushes may also occur.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 111

In the following steps bridge operation, under control of the REG_SLCT3 block SLCT3_BASE signal, is
checked. Three-phase, 60 hertz power is required for this test and may be obtained from the excitation
transformer secondary if the transformer can be energized. If a separate source must be used, it should
be sized to give sufficient static exciter load and provide a reasonable operating test. The test supply can
have a closed, three-phase delta configuration or a three-phase, wye configuration. Do not use an open-
delta source for this test. Confirm that the phase sequence of the supply voltage agrees with the system
drawings. The three-test voltage should be connected at the input of the 41A device.
1. To simulate an open-loop condition, enable control of the power bridge output by setting
SLCT3_BASE. With the DECS-2100 out of service (41A open), set variable SLCT3_K1 at zero in all
channels. Set variable SLCT3_BASEFC to 1.0 in all channels.
2. If the system has only one power bridge, proceed to step 3. For a system with more than one bridge,
enable only one bridge by placing all other bridges in maintenance mode. This is accomplished with
the maintenance logic block. It is crucial that the ECM-2 being accessed corresponds to the channel
in control.
3. With a suitable load connected, connect an oscilloscope to view the SCR firing pulses at the power
amplifier modules. Close the 41A device and observe that the power amplifier output voltage is near
the level of no-load field voltage if test source is less than normal ac input voltage level, the field
voltage output will be reduced proportionally to the ratio of test voltage to nominal voltage. The
observed exciter output waveform should be similar to the waveforms shown in Figure 118. Note that
six SCR firings per cycle are indicated by the six “bumps” per cycle in the output waveform.

Figure 118. Typical Power Bridge Output Waveforms

Note
In order for the firing pulses to be properly displayed on the
oscilloscope, the oscilloscope must be synchronized to the firing circuit
supply voltage. If the ac line isolation transducer receives its voltage
from the same 60 hertz test source, then the oscilloscope can be set
to line synchronization. If the excitation transformer is serving as the
test supply and the oscilloscope is connected to 60 hertz station
power, a separate synchronization signal should be supplied to the
external synchronization terminal of the oscilloscope and the
oscilloscope should be set for external synchronization. An
oscilloscope current probe is highly recommended for measuring SCR
firing pulses.

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
112 9411300990 Rev D

4. Verify that each firing pulse consists of a number of individual pickets, typically four pickets for each
firing pulse.

Caution
Do not dwell at ceiling voltage levels any longer than 60 seconds
unless the load is sized to handle continuous ceiling voltage. Load
resistors may become excessively hot during application of continuous
ceiling voltage. Allow sufficient cooling time (60 seconds) before
repeating the application of ceiling voltage.

5. Vary the SLCT3_BASE setting and observe that the firing pulses move from right to left on the
oscilloscope screen as the SLCT3_BASE setting increases (raise direction of the base adjuster).
Large values of SLCT3_BASE cause the unit to go to ceiling. Values of SLCT3_BASE near zero
cause the output voltage to approach zero. (Actual low-end voltage depends on whether or not the
simulated load is inductive.) Note that the negative output voltage—seen when the power bridge is
phased back to between 90 and 180 degrees of delay—is a momentary transient that appears only
with an inductive load.
The exciter output, in response to the SLCT3_BASE setting control, must be smooth and, with an
inductive load, approximately linear between the start of SCR conduction and near saturation voltage
(exciter ceiling voltage, where the ceiling voltage is 1.25 × test source voltage). Note that with a
resistive load, only the upper portion of the curve will be linear. Voltage will not decay to zero with
zero input.
6. Check the polarity of the field voltmeter in the control room.
7. Using the display panel, set the just-tested power bridge into maintenance mode and activate one of
the bridges previously set in maintenance mode. Repeat steps 3 through 6.
8. For a dual-channel system, when all bridges have been tested, transfer to the redundant channel and
repeat steps 3 through 7.
After completion of these power component tests, the logic circuitry should be tested. Leave the exciter
test load in series with the machine field and the test source ready for combination tests with the regulator
logic.

Adjusters, Followers, Regulators, & Controllers—Generator Not Spinning

Caution
Do not use the same 60 hertz test source simultaneously for the logic
modules and power modules. Test source power regulation may
cause unstable operation.

The following procedures provide methods for checking the more commonly used regulators, adjusters,
and controllers. For dual-channel systems, the following procedures should be performed first with the
main channel in control. Then, each step should be repeated with the redundant channel in control.
1. Check the setup of the automatic adjuster control (software block ACVLTADJ). With 41A closed use
the operator control to move the adjuster output from maximum to minimum. Observe
ACADJ_TRAVEL for the percent travel from 0 to 100. Verify that the maximum (ACADJ_REF),
minimum, and traverse time meet the operational requirements for the application.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 113

Open the 41A device and verify that the output returns to the soft start bias level. Check that this will
meet the site startup requirements. If used, check for correct operation of the adjuster position meter
or the minimum/maximum position indicator lights/contacts.
2. Check the setup of the manual adjuster control (software block MANADJ). Observe
MANADJ_TRAVEL for the percent of travel from 0 to 100. With the 41A device closed, use the
operator’s control to move the adjuster from maximum (MANADJ_REF) to minimum. Check that the
maximum, minimum, and traverse times are suited for the application requirements.
Open the 41A device and verify that the output returns to the soft start bias level. Check that this will
meet the site startup requirements. If used, check for correct operation of the adjuster position meter
or the minimum/maximum position indicator lights/contacts.
3. Check operation of the balance meter. With the 41A device open, disable the followers and var/power
factor controllers. Set RCOMP_XC and RCOMP_RC to zero in the REAC_COMP block. Set LDR_XD
and LDR_RC to zero in the LINEDROP block (if used). Set the PT and CT test sources to correspond
to rated values. Set the simulated field current to represent full-load field current. Verify that the
POWERTRN#00 block indicates the correct MW and Mvar readings. Close the 41A device. Set the
manual and auto adjuster outputs at 1.0. Confirm that the output of AUTO_MXR, as seen at the
REG_SLCT3 (SLCT3_ACR) and MAN_MXR (SLCT3_DCR), both read zero. Confirm that the
balance meter reads zero. Raise the auto adjuster and verify that the balance meter reads negative.
Raise the manual adjuster and verify that the balance meter returns to zero.
4. Check the manual adjuster followers. With the unit in auto mode and the followers disabled, lower the
PT test source to 98% of the rated value. Enable the followers. Check that the manual adjuster
(MANADJ_REF) output increases and the balance meter heads toward zero. The adjuster output
should stop moving when minimum is reached or when the balance meter approaches zero (within
the bandwidth of the manual follower).
5. Check the automatic adjuster followers. With the unit in manual mode and the followers disabled,
increase the PT test source to 100% of the rated value. Use the auto adjuster switch to return the
balance meter to zero. Set the simulated field current to 90% of full load and enable the followers.
Verify that the automatic adjuster (ACADJ_REF) output increases and the balance meter heads
toward zero. (The balance meter may cross zero and go positive.) The adjuster output should stop
moving when minimum is reached or when the balance meter approaches zero (within the bandwidth
of the automatic follower).
6. Return RCOMP_XC and RCOM_RC to their original values in the REAC_COMP block. Set the PT
and CT test signals to simulate 0 power factor, overexcited (lagging generator vars). For droop
compensation, ACREG_V2 should become more negative by the amount of droop compensation. For
rise compensation, ACREG_V2 should become more positive by the amount of droop compensation.
7. If line drop compensation is used, return the LINEDROP LDR_XCL and LDR_RCL parameters to
their original values. Apply PT and CT test signals that simulate 0 power factor, overexcited (lagging
generator vars). For droop compensation, ACREG_V2 should become more negative by the amount
of droop compensation. For rise compensation, ACREG_V2 should become more positive by the
amount of droop compensation.
8. If var control is used, check its setup through software block VARCONTR. With var control disabled,
set the PT and CT test signals to simulate rated load at unity power factor. Use the var control
raise/lower switches to set VRC_ERROR at zero. Reduce the PT test signal to below VRC_VMIN.
Adjust the CT test signal to simulate an overexcited generator (approximately 0.8 power factor,
lagging). Enable var control. Check the adjuster position and confirm that the ac adjuster output
remains unchanged. Return the PT test signal to the rated voltage. Verify that the output of the ac
adjuster decreases. Adjust the CT test signal to simulate an underexcited generator (approximately
0.8 power factor, leading). Confirm that the ac adjuster output increases.
9. If power factor control is used, check its setup through software block PFCONTR. With power factor
control disabled, set the PT and CT test signals to simulate rated load at unity power factor. Use the
power factor control raise/lower switches to set PFC_ERROR at zero. Reduce the PT test signal to
below PFC_VMIN. Adjust the CT test signal to simulate an overexcited generator (approximately 0.8
power factor, lagging). Enable power factor control. Check the adjuster position and confirm that the
ac adjuster output remains unchanged. Restore the PT test signal to the rated voltage and verify that
ECM-2 0BCommissioning
114 9411300990 Rev D

the output of the ac adjuster decreases. Adjust the CT test signal to simulate an underexcited
generator (approximately 0.8 power factor, leading). Confirm that the ac adjuster output increases.
10. For a dual-channel system, set the PT and CT test signals to the rated values and adjust the field
current source to represent full-load field current. With the main channel in control, access the display
panel screen dedicated to the transfer of channel control. Verify that the tracker window reads 0,
±0.1.
11. Transfer control to the redundant channel and repeat step 10.

Limiters and Protective Functions


The following procedures cover the more common limiter and protection features and provide methods for
checking each function. The event recorder in BESTCOMSPro can be used to check short time delays as
needed. For a dual-channel system, block calibration should be performed at the same time for both
channels to obtain matched results.

Note
If desired, after each pickup point is verified, the operation of each
limiter can be viewed by monitoring the power bridge output voltage.
The firing circuit must be brought to a reasonable level prior to
application of the pickup test signal. The firing signal can be adjusted
with the auto/manual adjusters. The tracking circuit (adjuster followers)
should be disabled to prevent interference with limiter operation during
testing.

Maximum Excitation Limiter


Check the operation of the overexcitation limiter (OEL {MXL} time delay). Check all contact outputs,
indicator lights, and annunciations associated with the OEL (MXL).

Note
When a step change is performed, any instability of the signal source
will cause false operation of the pickup point and affect the timing. The
signal can be monitored with the data logging function.

1. Verify that the recal inputs do not affect the output. Raise the field current sensing input until the OEL
(OEL00_F1) picks up and record this value as the limiter pickup. (The OEL output remains at
OEL00_OFF while the OEL is timing.)
2. Raise the field current sensing input until the OEL (OEL00_F3) picks up and record this value as the
protection pickup.
3. Set the field current sensing source at 4% over the limiter pickup threshold. De-energize the field
current sensing source and wait for the inverse timer to expire. Switch the field current sensing
source on and measure the time until the OEL times out. Record this time. OEL00_F2 becomes
TRUE when the inverse timer expires. Verify that the measured time is consistent with the A, B, and
C settings and that the timing is coordinated with the generator thermal capability (ANSI C50.10,
C50.12-C50.14). Remove the field current sensing source.
4. Set the field current sensing source at 30% over the limiter pickup threshold. De-energize the source
and wait for the inverse timer to expire. Switch the field current sensing source on and measure the
time until the limiter and protective functions time out. Record this time. Verify that the measured time
is consistent with the A, B, and C settings and that the timing is coordinated with the generator
thermal capability.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 115

5. Check for correct operation of flags to transfer channels, disable followers, and initiate a unit trip per
the application requirements.
6. If used, check the temperature recalibration.
7. If used check the pressure recalibration.
8. If dual setting groups are used, repeat Steps 1 through 7 for Setting Group 1.

Instantaneous Current Limiter


Check the operation of the instantaneous current limiter. Check all contact outputs, indicator lights, and
annunciations associated with the limiter.
1. Configure the system to simulate an open 52 breaker. Raise the field current test source input until
instantaneous limiter INS_F1 picks up and record this value as the offline limiter pickup.
2. Raise the field current test source until instantaneous limiter INS_F4 picks up and record this value as
the offline protection pickup. Remove the test source.
3. Set the test source at 4% over the offline protection pickup (INS_SP4). Switch the test source on and
measure the time until the INST_CUR timer expires. Record this value.
4. Configure the system to simulate a closed 52 breaker. Raise the level of the test source until
instantaneous limiter INS_F1 picks up. Record this value as the online limiter pickup.
5. Raise the field current test source until instantaneous limiter INS_F4 picks up. Record this value as
the online protection pickup. Remove the test source.
6. Adjust the test source to be 4% over online protection pickup INS_SP3 and remove the source.
Switch the source on and measure the time until all instantaneous current timers expire. Verify that
this value is coordinated with the generator thermal capability.
7. If dual setting groups are used, repeat Steps 1 through 6 for Setting Group 1.

Volts per Hertz Limiter


Check the operation of the volts per hertz limiter (HXL). Check all contact outputs, indicator lights, and
annunciations associated with the limiter.
1. Increase the PT test source until HXL_F1 picks up. Record this value as the limiter pickup. Increase
the test source until HXL_F3 picks up. Record this value as the protection pickup.
2. Reduce the PT test source 15%. Suddenly increase the signal to 4% over the limiter pickup. Measure
the time until HXL times out. HXL_F2 becomes TRUE after the inverse timer expires. Confirm that
this timing is consistent with the settings and that the timing is coordinated with the generator
voltage/thermal capability (ANSI C37.XX).
3. Reduce the test source to 10% of nominal. Suddenly increase the signal to 10% over the limiter
pickup. Measure the time until HXL times out. HXL_F2 becomes TRUE when the inverse timer
expires. Confirm that the time obtained is consistent with the settings and is coordinated with the
voltage/thermal capability of the generator.
4. If dual setting groups are used, repeat Steps 1 through 3 for Setting Group 1.

Overvoltage Limiter
Check the operation of the overvoltage limiter (OVL). Check all contact outputs, indicator lights, and
annunciations associated with the limiter.
1. Increase the PT test source voltage until OVL_F1 picks up. Record this value as the limiter pickup.
Increase the test source until OVL_F3 picks up and record this value as the protection pickup.
2. Reduce the PT test source to 10% of nominal. Suddenly increase the test source to 4% over the
limiter pickup. Measure the time until OVL times out. Verify that this timing is consistent per the
settings and that the timing is coordinated with the generator voltage capability.
3. If dual setting groups are used, repeat Steps 1 and 2 for Setting Group 1.

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
116 9411300990 Rev D

Minimum Excitation limiter


Check the operation of the minimum excitation limiter (MEL). Check all contact outputs, indicator lights,
and annunciations associated with the limiter.
1. Set the PT test source voltage at the rated value, the balance meter at zero, and the CT test source
at 0.5 Aac, 0 power factor. Simulate a closed 52 breaker. The MEL output should be negative and
equal to MEL_OFF. Increase the CT test source until the MEL picks up and record the value.
Increase the test source signal until MEL_F2 picks up and record the value.
2. Reduce the CT test source to 0.5 Aac. Then, increase the signal to 5% above the MEL_F2 pickup
and measure the time until the MEL_P timer expires. Record this timing.
3. Shift the phase angle 60 degrees to simulate 26 degrees (0.9 power factor, underexcited). Increase
the CT signal until the MEL picks up again and record the value. Typically, this value will be greater
than the CT signal at full-load, unity power factor. Verify that this value is coordinated with any loss of
field protection.
4. If dual setting groups are used, repeat Steps 1 through 3 for Setting Group 1.

Underexcitation Limiter
Check the operation of the underexcitation limiter (UEL). Check all contact outputs, indicator lights, and
annunciations associated with the limiter.
1. Verify that the re-cal inputs are not affecting the outputs. Set the PT test source at the rated value,
zero the balance meter, and set the CT test source at 0.5 Aac, 0 power factor, lead). Simulate a
closed 52 breaker. The UEL output should be negative and equal to UEL_OFF. Raise the CT test
signal until the UEL picks up and record the value. Increase the CT signal again until UEL_F2 picks
up. Record this value.
2. Reduce the CT signal to 0.5 Aac. Then, increase the CT signal to 5% above MEL_F2 pickup and
measure the time until the UEL_P timer expires. Record this value.
3. Shift the phase angle 60 degrees to simulate 26 degrees (0.9 power factor, underexcited). Increase
the CT test source until the UEL picks up again. Record this value. Typically, this value will be greater
than the CT signal at full-load, unity power factor. Verify that this value is coordinated with any loss of
field protection.
4. If used, check the temperature recalibration.
5. If used check the pressure recalibration.
6. If dual setting groups are used, repeat Steps 1 through 5 for Setting Group 1.

Loss of Sensing and Other Limiter and Protection Settings


1. Check the loss of sensing. Verify operation of all relay outputs, indicator lights, and other
annunciations associated with loss of sensing. Remove one fuse to simulate a failed fuse.
2. Check the operation of any other limiter and protective features.
3. Set all limiters and protection elements according to the site requirements. Settings are the
responsibility of the end-user.

Monitoring Functions
Test the operation of all protective circuits, using test sources as required.

Generator Ground Detector


Check the operation of the generator ground detector and all associated relay outputs, indicator lights,
and annunciators. A typical test procedure is provided as follows. Use BESTCOMSPro to access the
FLDGND block.
1. Disconnect pin 5 of the ground detector from the field.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 117

2. Apply 120 Vac, 60 Hz to pins 6 and 7. Remove the resistor connected at pins 10 and 12. Verify that
there is not voltage across pins 1 and 2. Verify that output AD00_IN_A is a least +0.01. (This offset
voltage must always be positive.) Adjust parameter AD00_OFFSET_3, as needed, to obtain at least
+0.01 at output AD00_IN_A.
3. Force the appropriate relay on to apply 120 Vac across pins 8 and 9. Connect a 1 MΩ resistor (RT) at
pins 10 and 12. Measure the voltage output across RT (120 Vdc, ±20 Vdc). Confirm that parameter
FLDGND)SOURCEVOLTS equals that voltage. Disconnect RT from pins 10 and 11.
4. Connect a 1 kΩ resistor between the –125 V output (pin 5) and ground. Measure the voltage across
the resistor. Also measure the voltage across pins 1 and 2. Verify that output AD00_IN_A is the same
as the voltage measured across pins 1 and 2 (±0.001). If it is not, set AD00_RTDGAIN_3 to make it
match. Check that output FLDGND_GROUNDCURRENT equals the voltage across the 1 kΩ resistor.
If it does not adjust FLDGND_ITSCALE to make it match.
5. With the 1 kΩ resistor still connected across pins 4 and 5, FLDGND_RMIN should equal 1 k, ±0.3 k. If
it does not, adjust FLDGND_SOURCEOHMS to make it match. Verify that the field ground alarm
indications signify that a field ground has occurred.
6. Verify that FLDGND_VFSCALE equals the field voltage that was used to set the transducers.
7. Remove the 1 kΩ resistor from pins 4 and 5. Connect the 1 MΩ resistor (RT) across pins 10 and 12.
Verify that FLDGND_RMIN equals 1000 K, ±300 K. Verify that all field ground alarm indications have
cleared.

Field Overtemperature Alarms


If used, test the function of the field overtemperature alarms and all associated relay outputs, indicator
lights, and annunciators.
1. With the field voltage and current test source set at 1.0 per unit, check that FLDTEMP00_RBASE
equals the base load resistance and FLDTEMP00_TBASE equals the field temperature at which the
base load resistance was calculated. Check the metering outputs.
2. Reduce the simulated field current to 10% of nominal and check the alarms.

Reconnection to PPT or PMG


At this point, the entire DECS-2100 system has been checked and the system can be reconnected to the
machine in preparation for startup. All test voltage and sources should be removed and all system
components should be restored to the normal, in-service state. All test jumpers should be removed, all
protection functions restored, and all lifted leads re-landed.

Caution
Be sure that all external connections and settings are correct before
proceeding.

1. Enable the following circuits:


a. Minimum excitation limiter
b. Volts per hertz limiter
c. Maximum excitation limiter
d. Instantaneous limiter
e. Unit trip
2. Before startup of the generator:

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
118 9411300990 Rev D

a. Check that all limiter and protection settings have been made. (Settings are the responsibility
of the end-user.)
b. Verify that the generator circuit breaker (52), device 41A, and flashing contactor 31 (if used)
are open.
c. Check that the manual adjuster (MANADJ_PP1) is set to give 70% no-load field current.
d. Verify that auto mode is selected and var or power factor control is disabled.
e. Check that the followers are disabled.
f. Check that all droop or rise compensators are disabled.
g. Close the three-pole, potential switch for the regulator PTs and the CT input switch. If used,
close the three-pole potential switch for the metering PTs.
h. Confirm that the connections to the generator field have been reconnected.
i. Confirm that the connections to the PPT or PMG have been reconnected.
j. Confirm that the space heaters have been reconnected.
k. Verify that the field ground detector connections have been reestablished.
l. Verify that all unit trip circuit connections have been made.
m. Check that all connections between the shunt and transducer have been remade.
3. Using BESTCOMSPro, establish an event recorder block to measure terminal voltage, firing
commands, field current, 41A close commands, 41A status, and 41A trip commands (both
instantaneous and time delayed) when the breaker is closed the first time. Set an event to be
triggered by the 41A close command. If field flashing is used, the 31 close command should also be
recorded. Other inputs may be recorded as desired.
4. Verify that the correct phase sequence exists at both the input terminals of device 41A and the
regulator input panel terminals. On shunt-powered systems, this can be done using an oscilloscope
looking at the residual generator voltage.
5. If a PMG is used, before closing the 41A device, verify that the magnitude of the PMG voltage
complies with the value listed on the system drawings.

Offline Excitation Control


1. With the generator operating at rated speed, close device 41A. Review the event to verify correct
operation of the equipment during the start.

Caution
Verify immediately that the generator field current corresponds to the
value set by PP#1 in the MANADJ block if the unit remains in manual
mode. If the unit is in auto mode, verify that the generator terminal
voltage corresponds to the value set by PP#1 in the AUTOADJ block.
Trip device 41A if the terminal voltage is excessive or if the field
current measured is radically higher than the machine field data
specifications.

Note
If the manual adjuster is set too low, the unit will not transfer into auto
mode. Raise the manual adjuster to enable a transfer into auto mode.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 119

2. If the unit is operating in manual mode, use the manual adjuster to make the terminal voltage equal to
1.0 per unit. (If the field current instantaneous limiter prevents raising voltage, increase the offline trip
setting first and then the offline limiter setting.) Enable the adjusters and verify that the balance meter
indicates nearly zero. Transfer the unit to auto mode. The terminal voltage bump should be small.

Caution
Do not exceed the machine voltage rating during any of these tests.
Exceeding the voltage ratings may result in personal injury and
equipment damage.

3. If the unit is operating in auto mode, use the auto adjuster to make the terminal voltage equal to 1.0
per unit. (If the field current instantaneous limiter prevents raising voltage, increase the offline trip
setting first and then the offline limiter setting.) Enable the adjuster followers and verify that the
balance meter indicates nearly zero. Transfer the unit to manual mode, and then back to auto mode.
The bump in terminal voltage should be small.
4. If the output field temperature monitor is being used, check that FLDTEMP00_FIELDTEMP equals
the temperature of the cold rotor field. (This should be checked before the field has had a chance to
warm up.) If the values do not match, adjust FLDTEMP00_TBASE.
5. Holding the machine at rated speed and rated, no-load terminal voltage, check the three-phase
voltage present at regulator input panel terminals 7-8-9. This voltage should be approximately 120 VL-
L and have a phase sequence of 7-8-9. The metered value should agree with the regulator Pt ratio on
the system drawings. If the values disagree, determine the cause before proceeding.
6. Verify that the output of the terminal voltage transducers reads 1.00. (Check both channels for a dual-
channel system.) If the output is incorrect, adjust the scale factors in the SIGIN block of each channel.
7. Verify that SLCT3_V8 reads between 1.0 and 1.15. (A precise value for V8 should be based on the
generator saturation curve and be equal to the actual field current at no load divided by the air gap
field current at rated voltage (read from the saturation curve).) Adjust SLCT3_KFC to correct the
SLCT3_V8 reading as needed. For a dual-channel system, change SLCT3_KFC in the redundant
channel to the adjusted value.
8. Confirm operation of the manual regulator (unit is in auto mode) in both the raise and lower directions.
This is accomplished by moving the manual voltage adjuster to cause the regulator balance meter to
indicate one side of zero and then the other side of zero. This action by the voltage adjuster should
not affect the machine terminal voltage.
9. Move the voltage adjuster in the lower direction. This action should reduce the machine terminal
voltage. The balance meter should return to near zero. Move the voltage adjuster in the raise
direction, causing the machine terminal voltage to return to normal. Adjust ACADJ_SLEW as needed
for smooth voltage control.
10. Transfer the unit to manual mode and move the manual adjuster in the lower direction. This action
should reduce the machine terminal voltage. The balance meter should return to near zero. Move the
voltage adjuster in the raise direction, causing the machine terminal voltage to return to normal.
Adjust MANADJ_SLEW as needed for smooth voltage control.
11. Return the unit to auto mode.
12. For a dual-channel system, verify the tracker and that “transfer possible” is enabled. Verify that the
tracker value is close to 0, ±0.1. Transfer control to the redundant channel and repeat steps 8 through
11.
If desired, the unit can be switched to the redundant channel with the 41A device open. The
generator field can be flashed again and the steps in this chapter repeated.

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
120 9411300990 Rev D

Offline Stability and Damping

Note
The offline instantaneous limiter must be set high enough so as not to
impact the bump test. Positive voltage bumps with a rotating exciter
can cause the limiter to effectively reduce the generator ceiling voltage
and make the response look like that of an over- or critically-damped
regulator. See Figure 119.

Figure 119. Generator Output Responses

Stability and damping adjustments of the system are usually made with the synchronous machine offline
(except for synchronous condensers that must be connected to the system to operate). If settings have
been determined by stability studies, those values should be set before performing bump testing.

Caution
Exercise care when performing these tests to avoid subjecting the
machine to terminal voltages that exceed its rating.

1. Using BESTCOMSPro set up an event recorder to measure the bump input signal (EXC_SIG output
of the SSE block), terminal voltage, field voltage, firing command, and field current during the offline
bump tests. Configure the event to trigger on application of the bump signal. Configure the duration of
the event recorder to capture both the application and removal of the bump input signal. Other inputs
may be recorded as desired.
2. With the generator operating at rated speed and offline, adjust the terminal voltage to rated value by
means of the auto adjuster.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 121

3. Using the Time Response window of BESTCOMSPro configure a test signal type of “Step” with a
magnitude of -0.010, and step duration of 10 seconds. Configure the test signal injection location to
“Auto Error”. Initiate a voltage bump test by pressing “Start”. Gradually increase voltage bumps to 5%
changes first in the lower direction (negative magnitude) and then in the raise direction (positive
magnitude) for various damping adjustments. By observing the response action on the data record,
optimum damping adjustments can be made. See Figure 119 for suggested optimum response
conditions. Exercise care so that the unit is not under damped when offline. This can cause
oscillations when the unit is operating online.

Machine PT and CT Signal Polarity and Phase Angle


1. Use BESTCOMSPro to configure an event recorder block to measure the regulator PT inputs, CT
inputs, and terminal voltage. If metering PTs are used, they should also be recorded. Synchronize the
machine with the power grid. Load the machine to approximately 10% rated MW load (or higher if
required by turbine conditions).
2. With the generator connected to the power system (breaker 52 closed) and the machine operating at
unity power factor, check the phase angle between the current and voltage. At unity power factor, the
B-phase line current should lag the A-B line voltage by approximately 150 degrees. If needed, adjust
POWERTRN00_PHASE (for all channels) to make POWERTRN00_MVAR read 0.00 at unity power
factor. This compensates for phase shifts between the regulator PTs and CTs from the ideal 150
degree phase shift.
3. Enable all reactive compensation functions. Verify the required settings with the end-user. For
satisfactory parallel operation, there should be a 4 to 6% reactance between the machine terminals
and the system. This reactance can be in the generator step-up transformer (GSU) or the regulator
can be biased by the droop compensator. In this case, a setting of 4 to 6% reactive droop will achieve
the desired result.
4. Using auto control, raise the level of excitation slightly. That is, set the generator to supply vars to the
system. For droop compensation, verify that the adjuster reference moves slightly more than the
terminal voltage increase. Verify that for rise compensation, the adjuster reference moves slightly less
than the terminal voltage increase.
5. After verifying that the regulator balance meter is near zero, transfer from auto to manual control
mode. Carefully operate the manual adjuster slightly in the lower and raise directions. Observe that
the machine reactive loading decreases in response to lowering the adjuster and increases in
response to raising the manual adjuster. Transfer the system back to automatic control.
6. For a dual-channel system, verify that tracker is reading close to zero and then transfer from the main
channel to the redundant channel. The oscillations in voltage should be very small. Repeat step 5.
Transfer control of the system back to the main channel.
7. If desired, a bump test can be performed at this time. When performing an online bump, care should
be taken to avoid excessive var swings. Use the adjuster to determine how much voltage change
corresponds to a 10% var change. Typically, the magnitude of the bump should cause no more than
a 10% var change. Check with the end-user to determine a desired or expected value. An event
recording for an online bump should include terminal voltage, firing command, field current, and
machine Mvar and MW.
8. If possible, increase the machine load to rated MW and power factor. Field current transducer scaling
should be checked at full load. At full load, the field current transducer should read 1.00. Note that if
the field current transducer scaling is changed, the offline settings must also be adjusted.

Var/Power Factor Control

Caution
If any raise or lower operations cause system disturbances, quickly
transfer control from auto to manual mode.

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
122 9411300990 Rev D

Verify that the var controller error is near zero. Place the system in var mode. Raise and lower the var
level using the var controls. Adjust VRC_SLEW (VARCONTR block) or PFC_SLEW (PFCONTR block) as
needed for smooth control.

Power System Stabilizer


Configuration and testing of the PSS should be performed only by a person experienced in power system
stabilizer operation.

Limiters
If a PSS is used, the PSS should be tuned and in service while doing any limiter tests. As required, each
limiter should be tested to take control of the excitation system online. An offset may be put into the limiter
setpoint to recalibrate the pickup to occur in a safe region of operation.

Final Check of System Operation


Upon completion of all testing, final checks of system operation should be made with the machine
connected to the system. A final check of the ground detector should also be made.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 123

Module Setup Summary


Tables 6-2 through 6-3 are provided as aids in configuring the ECM-2 and isolation transducers.

Table 18. Summary of PPT or PMG Transducer Setup


INPUT SET INPUT TO MAKE OUTPUT
INPUT VALUE BLOCK
CONNECTION PARAMETER READ
J19 to J20 ZERO (Short) FLDSCALE PPT_OFFSETA PPT_PTA = 0+2 counts

DC Voltage equal to PPT PPT_SCALEA PPT_PTA = 1.000+.0009


Secondary Peak (√2 *
rms)
J21 to J22 ZERO (Short) FLDSCALE PPT_OFFSETB PPT_PTB=0+2 counts

DC Voltage equal to PPT PPT_SCALEB PPT_PTB = 1.000+.0009


Secondary Peak (√2 *
rms)

Table 19. Summary of Field Current and Voltage Transducer Setup


INPUT BLOCK (in SET INPUT TO MAKE OUTPUT
INPUT VALUE
CONNECTION ECM) PARAMETER READ
J21 to J22 ZERO (Short) FLDSCALE VG_OFFSET GEN_FLD_VLT
= 0+2 counts
DC Volts = 100% of VG_SCALE GEN_FLD_VLT
GENERATOR RATED = 1.000+.0009
FULL LOAD at 75 DEG. C
J19 to J20 ZERO (Short) FLDSCALE IG_OFFSET GEN_FLD_CUR
= 0+2 counts
DC mV = 100% of IG_SCALE GEN_FLD_CUR
GENERATOR RATED = 1.000+.0009
FULL LOAD
J21 to J22 ZERO (Short) FLDSCALE VE_OFFSET EXC_FLD_VLT
= 0+2 counts
DC Volts = 100% of VE_SCALE EXC_FLD_VLT
EXCITER RATED FULL = 1.000+.0009
LOAD at 75 DEG. C
J19 to J20 ZERO (Short) FLDSCALE IE_OFFSET EXC_FLD_CUR
= 0+2 counts
DC mV = 100% of IE_SCALE EXC_FLD_CUR
EXCITER RATED FULL = 1.000+.0009
LOAD

Auto Tuning

Caution
PID values calculated by the Auto Tuning function are to be
implemented only after their suitability for the application has been
verified by the user. Incorrect PID numbers can result in poor system
performance or equipment damage.

During commissioning, excitation system parameters are not known. These unknown variables
traditionally cause the commissioning process to consume a large amount of time and fuel. With the
development of auto tuning the excitation system parameters are automatically identified and the PID
ECM-2 0BCommissioning
124 9411300990 Rev D

gains are calculated using well-developed algorithms. Automatically tuning the PID controller greatly
reduces commissioning time and cost. The auto tuning function is accessed by clicking the Auto Tune
option under View Explorer, Commissioning. BESTCOMSPro must be connected to an ECM-2 in order to
begin the auto tuning process. The auto tune window provides options for choosing Design Method for
PID, Exciter Type, and Power Input Type. When the desired settings are selected, the Start button is
clicked to start the process. See Figure 120.

Figure 120. Auto Tune Window

Design Method for PID: Set to either Pole Zero Cancellation or Pole Placement.
Exciter Type: Set to either Rotary or Static.
Power Input Type: Set to either PMG External or Shunt.
Start: Begins the auto tuning process.
The File menu contains the following selections:
Options: The options window is displayed.
Stop Test: The current test is stopped.
Run Loop Gain: Runs loop gain.
Run Step Only: Runs step only.
Synch Graph Scrolling: When the checkbox is checked, the graphs are all set to the same position on the
X-axis and they scroll simultaneously when one of the graphs is scrolled.
The options window contains the following four tabs, illustrated in Figure 121, Figure 123, Figure 122, and
Figure 124:
Steady State: Set the delay, time, threshold, bias, and PP.
Steady State Controller: Set Kp, Ki, and K1.
Step: Set the step magnitude, time, and Kp.
Misc.: Set the sample rate.

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 125

Figure 121. Steady State Tab Figure 122. Step Tab

Figure 123. Steady State Controller Tab Figure 124. Misc Tab

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
126 9411300990 Rev D

Right-clicking on the graph areas displays the following options. See Figure 130.

Copy: Copy the image of the graph to the clipboard.


Save Image As: Save the image of the graph as a .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, .bmp.
Page Setup: Set up the printing options.
Print: Print the graph.
Un-Zoom: Reset the zoom.
Undo All Zoom/Pan: Reset the zoom and pan position to the original state.
Export Data: Export the graph data as a .txt file.
Cursors: Contains options for Goto Cursor X and Move Cursor X into View.
Lines: Display Data Points, Show Point Values, Interpolated, Smooth, Step.
Format: Toggle Background Color, Show Grid Lines, X Axis Autofit.
Set X Scale: Scaling Options, Manual or Automatic, Minimum, Maximum.
Figure 125. Right-
Click Menu
Rolling the mouse wheel up or down when the cursor is hovering over the graph
area causes the view to zoom in or out.

Auto Tune Screen Functions


The Auto Tune screen functions are described below.
• Parameters are selected for Design Method for PID, Exciter Type, and Power Input Type.
• With the generator running and offline (no load, not tied to grid), the Start button is clicked to start
auto tune. Generator voltage drops and a softstart begins.
• A step response is performed after softstart completes and the voltage is stable to within the
THRESH input parameter.
• The PID value is calculated after the step response is complete.
• The number of iterations during calculation is displayed above the graph window. (Maximum iteration
count = 100).
• Calculated gain and time constant parameters are displayed which must be applied appropriately to
the system.

AUTOTUNE Logic Inputs/Outputs


Table 20 describes the AUTOTUNE logic inputs and outputs.
Table 20. AUTOTUNE Logic Inputs and Outputs

Input Name Description


REG_FIR_CMD Regulator normal firing command.
GEN_VOLTS Generator voltage input.
ENABLE Permissive enable logic input.
CONFIG Config word
Set bit 0 to “1” when shunt excited
MODE Autotune mode. Set automatically by BESTCOMSPro
during the auto tuning process.
0 – Disabled
1 – PI Control
2 – P Control
3 – Step response
SSTIME Soft Start Time

SSBIAS Soft Start Bias

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 127

Input Name Description


PP Soft Start Preposition. Set automatically by
BESTCOMSPro during the auto tuning process.
THRESH Steady State Threshold

TD Steady State Time Delay

STEP_KP Proportional gain for step response. Set automatically


by BESTCOMSPro during the auto tuning process.
STEP_MAG Step input magnitude for step response

STEP_TIME Step input time for step response

KI Integral gain for PI control

KP Proportional gain for PI control

K1 FIRING_CMD output gain. Set by BESTCOMSPro to


the calculated system loop gain when
AUTOTUNE_MODE is 2 or 3.
RATE Buffering rate limit. Used by BESTCOMSPro to control
rate at which data samples are collected and plotted
during auto tuning process. Set automatically by
BESTCOMSPro during the auto tuning process.
MIN_FIR_CMD Minimum firing command output during the auto
tuning process
Output Name Description
STATUS Bit 0 is set to “1” when the PI controller reaches
steady state.
ACTIVE TRUE when AUTOTUNE block is not inhibited by
ENABLE input and BESTCOMSPro starts the auto
tuning process
FIRING_CMD Output signal of active controller

ECM-2 0BCommissioning
128 9411300990 Rev D

0BCommissioning ECM-2
9411300990 Rev C 129

Modbus™ Communication
Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices. Nonvolatile
memory is used to store information (such as settings) that needs to be
preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise restarted.
Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a physical limit on the
number of times they can be erased and written. In this product, the limit is
100,000 erase/write cycles. During product application, consideration should
be given to communications, logic, and other factors that may cause
frequent/repeated writes of settings or other information that is retained by the
product. Applications that result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce
the useable product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.

Controller #1 Modbus® Coil Map


Tables B-1 through B-4 list the Modbus Coil Map for Controller #1. The same coil map is used for
Controllers #3 and #5 (when present).

Table 21. Local HMI Inputs (Controller #1 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
001 PMIN_COIL01 State written to Modbus coil address 001
002 PMIN_COIL02 State written to Modbus coil address 002
003 PMIN_COIL03 State written to Modbus coil address 003
004 PMIN_COIL04 State written to Modbus coil address 004
005 PMIN_COIL05 State written to Modbus coil address 005
006 PMIN_COIL06 State written to Modbus coil address 006
007 PMIN_COIL07 State written to Modbus coil address 007
008 PMIN_COIL08 State written to Modbus coil address 008
009 PMIN_COIL09 State written to Modbus coil address 009
010 PMIN_COIL10 State written to Modbus coil address 010
011 PMIN_COIL11 State written to Modbus coil address 011
012 PMIN_COIL12 State written to Modbus coil address 012
013 PMIN_COIL13 State written to Modbus coil address 013
014 PMIN_COIL14 State written to Modbus coil address 014
015 PMIN_COIL15 State written to Modbus coil address 015
016 PMIN_COIL16 State written to Modbus coil address 016
017 PMIN_COIL17 State written to Modbus coil address 017
018 PMIN_COIL18 State written to Modbus coil address 018
019 PMIN_COIL19 State written to Modbus coil address 019
020 PMIN_COIL20 State written to Modbus coil address 020
021 PMIN_COIL21 State written to Modbus coil address 021
022 PMIN_COIL22 State written to Modbus coil address 022
023 PMIN_COIL23 State written to Modbus coil address 023

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


130 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


024 PMIN_COIL24 State written to Modbus coil address 024
025 PMIN_COIL25 State written to Modbus coil address 025
026 PMIN_COIL26 State written to Modbus coil address 026
027 PMIN_COIL27 State written to Modbus coil address 027
028 PMIN_COIL28 State written to Modbus coil address 028
029 PMIN_COIL29 State written to Modbus coil address 029
030 PMIN_COIL30 State written to Modbus coil address 030
031 PMIN_COIL31 State written to Modbus coil address 031
032 PMIN_COIL32 State written to Modbus coil address 032
033 PMIN_COIL33 State written to Modbus coil address 033
034 PMIN_COIL34 State written to Modbus coil address 034
035 PMIN_COIL35 State written to Modbus coil address 035
036 PMIN_COIL36 State written to Modbus coil address 036
037 PMIN_COIL37 State written to Modbus coil address 037
038 PMIN_COIL38 State written to Modbus coil address 048
039 PMIN_COIL39 State written to Modbus coil address 039
040 PMIN_COIL40 State written to Modbus coil address 040
041 PMIN_COIL41 State written to Modbus coil address 041
042 PMIN_COIL42 State written to Modbus coil address 042
043 PMIN_COIL43 State written to Modbus coil address 043
044 PMIN_COIL44 State written to Modbus coil address 044
045 PMIN_COIL45 State written to Modbus coil address 045
046 PMIN_COIL46 State written to Modbus coil address 046
047 PMIN_COIL47 State written to Modbus coil address 047
048 PMIN_COIL48 State written to Modbus coil address 048

Table 22. Remote HMI Inputs (Controller #1 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
049 PMIN_COIL49 State written to Modbus coil address 049
050 PMIN_COIL50 State written to Modbus coil address 050
051 PMIN_COIL51 State written to Modbus coil address 051
052 PMIN_COIL52 State written to Modbus coil address 052
053 PMIN_COIL53 State written to Modbus coil address 053
054 PMIN_COIL54 State written to Modbus coil address 054
055 PMIN_COIL55 State written to Modbus coil address 055
056 PMIN_COIL56 State written to Modbus coil address 056
057 PMIN_COIL57 State written to Modbus coil address 057
058 PMIN_COIL58 State written to Modbus coil address 058
059 PMIN_COIL59 State written to Modbus coil address 059
060 PMIN_COIL60 State written to Modbus coil address 060
061 PMIN_COIL61 State written to Modbus coil address 061
062 PMIN_COIL62 State written to Modbus coil address 062
063 PMIN_COIL63 State written to Modbus coil address 063

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 131

Coil Variable Description


064 PMIN_COIL64 State written to Modbus coil address 064

Table 23. Digital Outputs (Controller #1 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
097 PMOUT_PCOIL97 State available to Modbus coil address 097
098 PMOUT_PCOIL98 State available to Modbus coil address 098
099 PMOUT_PCOIL99 State available to Modbus coil address 099
100 PMOUT_PCOIL100 State available to Modbus coil address 100
101 PMOUT_PCOIL101 State available to Modbus coil address 101
102 PMOUT_PCOIL102 State available to Modbus coil address 102
103 PMOUT_PCOIL103 State available to Modbus coil address 103
104 PMOUT_PCOIL104 State available to Modbus coil address 104
105 PMOUT_PCOIL105 State available to Modbus coil address 105
106 PMOUT_PCOIL106 State available to Modbus coil address 106
107 PMOUT_PCOIL107 State available to Modbus coil address 107
108 PMOUT_PCOIL108 State available to Modbus coil address 108
109 PMOUT_PCOIL109 State available to Modbus coil address 109
110 PMOUT_PCOIL110 State available to Modbus coil address 110
111 PMOUT_PCOIL111 State available to Modbus coil address 111
112 PMOUT_PCOIL112 State available to Modbus coil address 112
113 PMOUT_PCOIL113 State available to Modbus coil address 113
114 PMOUT_PCOIL114 State available to Modbus coil address 114
115 PMOUT_PCOIL115 State available to Modbus coil address 115
116 PMOUT_PCOIL116 State available to Modbus coil address 116
117 PMOUT_PCOIL117 State available to Modbus coil address 117
118 PMOUT_PCOIL118 State available to Modbus coil address 118
119 PMOUT_PCOIL119 State available to Modbus coil address 119
120 PMOUT_PCOIL120 State available to Modbus coil address 120
121 PMOUT_PCOIL121 State available to Modbus coil address 121
122 PMOUT_PCOIL122 State available to Modbus coil address 122
123 PMOUT_PCOIL123 State available to Modbus coil address 123
124 PMOUT_PCOIL124 State available to Modbus coil address 124
125 PMOUT_PCOIL125 State available to Modbus coil address 125
126 PMOUT_PCOIL126 State available to Modbus coil address 126
127 PMOUT_PCOIL127 State available to Modbus coil address 127
128 PMOUT_PCOIL128 State available to Modbus coil address 128
129 PMOUT_PCOIL129 State available to Modbus coil address 129
130 PMOUT_PCOIL130 State available to Modbus coil address 100
131 PMOUT_PCOIL131 State available to Modbus coil address 131
132 PMOUT_PCOIL132 State available to Modbus coil address 132
133 PMOUT_PCOIL133 State available to Modbus coil address 133
134 PMOUT_PCOIL134 State available to Modbus coil address 134
135 PMOUT_PCOIL135 State available to Modbus coil address 135

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


132 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


136 PMOUT_PCOIL136 State available to Modbus coil address 136
137 PMOUT_PCOIL137 State available to Modbus coil address 137
138 PMOUT_PCOIL138 State available to Modbus coil address 138
139 PMOUT_PCOIL139 State available to Modbus coil address 139
140 PMOUT_PCOIL140 State available to Modbus coil address 140
141 PMOUT_PCOIL141 State available to Modbus coil address 141
142 PMOUT_PCOIL142 State available to Modbus coil address 142
143 PMOUT_PCOIL143 State available to Modbus coil address 143
144 PMOUT_PCOIL144 State available to Modbus coil address 144
145 PMOUT_PCOIL145 State available to Modbus coil address 145
146 PMOUT_PCOIL146 State available to Modbus coil address 146
147 PMOUT_PCOIL147 State available to Modbus coil address 147
148 PMOUT_PCOIL148 State available to Modbus coil address 148
149 PMOUT_PCOIL149 State available to Modbus coil address 149
150 PMOUT_PCOIL150 State available to Modbus coil address 150
151 PMOUT_PCOIL151 State available to Modbus coil address 151
152 PMOUT_PCOIL152 State available to Modbus coil address 152
153 PMOUT_PCOIL153 State available to Modbus coil address 153
154 PMOUT_PCOIL154 State available to Modbus coil address 154
155 PMOUT_PCOIL155 State available to Modbus coil address 155
156 PMOUT_PCOIL156 State available to Modbus coil address 156
157 PMOUT_PCOIL157 State available to Modbus coil address 157
158 PMOUT_PCOIL158 State available to Modbus coil address 158
159 PMOUT_PCOIL159 State available to Modbus coil address 159
160 PMOUT_PCOIL160 State available to Modbus coil address 160

Table 24. Status Blocks (Controller #1 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
161 STATSYS_41A_CLOSED 41A excitation breaker closed when TRUE
162 STATSYS_52G_CLOSED 52G generator breaker closed when TRUE
163 STATSYS_AUTO Exciter in AUTO control mode when TRUE
164 STATSYS_MANUAL Exciter in MANUAL control mode when TRUE
165 STATSYS_REMOTE Exciter in REMOTE control when TRUE
166 STATSYS_CHN_CNTL TRUE when this control channel is in control
167 STATSYS_PSS_EN PSS is enabled when TRUE
168 STATSYS_PSS_CNTL PSS is active when TRUE
169 STATSYS_VM_EN Voltage matching feature in enabled when TRUE
170 STATSYS_VM_CMPLT Voltage matching is complete when TRUE
171 STATSYS_SYNC_EN Automatic synchronizer is enabled when TRUE
172 STATSYS_SYNC_ACT Automatic synchronizer is active when TRUE
173 STATSYS_SYNC_VOLT_MATCH Automatic synchronizer has matched voltage within
threshold when TRUE

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 133

Coil Variable Description


174 STATSYS_SYNC_FREQ_MATCH Automatic synchronizer has matched frequency within
threshold when TRUE
175 STATSYS_VAR_EN VAR controller (or regulator) is enabled when TRUE
176 STATSYS_VAR_CNTL VAR controller (or regulator) is active when TRUE
177 STATSYS_PF_EN PF controller (or regulator) is enabled when TRUE
178 STATSYS_PF_CNTL VAR controller (or regulator) is active when TRUE
179 STATSYS_SIM_ON Simulation mode is active when TRUE
180 STATSYS_USB_RDY USB port is ready when TRUE
181 STATSYS_USB_DONE USB port activity is complete when TRUE
182 STATSYS_USB_DISCON USB flash drive safe to remove when TRUE
183 Spare1
184 Spare2
185 Spare3
186 Spare4
187 Spare5
188 Spare6
189 Spare7
190 Spare8
191 Spare9
192 Spare10
193 STATLIM_OELG_PU Generator field OEL picked-up/timing
194 STATLIM_OELG_TIMOUT Generator field OEL timed out
195 STATLIM_OELG_CNTL Generator field OEL in control
196 STATLIM_OELE_PU Exciter field OEL picked-up/timing
197 STATLIM_OELE_TIMOUT Exciter field OEL timed out
198 STATLIM_OELE_CNTL Exciter field OEL in control
199 STATLIM_INST_PU INST limiter picked-up/timing
200 STATLIM_INST_TIMOUT INST limiter timed-out
201 STATLIM_INST_CNTL INST limiter in control
202 STATLIM_MFEL_PU MFEL picked-up/timing
203 STATLIM_MFEL_TIMOUT MFEL timed out
204 STATLIM_MFEL_CNTL MFEL in control
205 STATLIM_OVL_PU OVL picked-up/timing
206 STATLIM_OVL_TIMOUT OVL timed out
207 STATLIM_OVL_CNTL OVL in control
208 STATLIM_UVL_PU UVL picked-up/timing
209 STATLIM_UVL_TIMOUT UVL timed out
210 STATLIM_UVL_CNTL UVL in control
211 STATLIM_HXL_PU HXL picked-up/timing
212 STATLIM_HXL_TIMOUT HXL timed out
213 STATLIM_HXL_CNTL HXL in control
214 STATLIM_VRL_PU VRL picked-up/timing
215 STATLIM_VRL_TIMOUT VRL timed out

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


134 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


216 STATLIM_VRL_CNTL VRL in control
217 STATLIM_MEL_PU MEL picked-up/timing
218 STATLIM_MEL_TIMOUT MEL timed out
219 STATLIM_MEL_CNTL MEL in control
220 STATLIM_UEL_PU UEL picked-up/timing
221 STATLIM_UEL_TIMOUT UEL timed out
222 STATLIM_UEL_CNTL UEL in control
223 STATLIM_GCL_PU GCL picked-up/timing
224 STATLIM_GCL_TIMOUT GCL timed out
225 STATLIM_GCL_CNTL GCL in control
226 STATLIM_RECAL_CLIP Limiter recalibration input(s) clipped
227 Spare1
228 Spare2
229 Spare3
230 Spare4
231 Spare5
232 Spare6
233 Spare7
234 Spare8
235 Spare9
236 Spare10
237 Spare11
238 Spare12
239 Spare13
240 Spare14
241 STATXFER_OELG_RED Generator field OEL transfer to redundant
242 STATXFER_OELG_MAN Generator field OEL transfer to manual
243 STATXFER_OELE_RED Exciter field OEL transfer to redundant
244 STATXFER_OELE_MAN Exciter field OEL transfer to manual
245 STATXFER_INST_RED INST limiter transfer to redundant
246 STATXFER_INST_MAN INST limiter transfer to manual
247 STATXFER_MFEL_RED MFEL transfer to redundant
248 STATXFER_MFEL_MAN MFEL transfer to manual
249 STATXFER_OVL_RED OVL transfer to redundant
250 STATXFER_OVL_MAN OVL transfer to manual
251 STATXFER_UVL_RED UVL transfer to redundant
252 STATXFER_UVL_MAN UVL transfer to manual
253 STATXFER_HXL_RED HXL transfer to redundant
254 STATXFER_HXL_MAN HXL transfer to manual
255 STATXFER_VRL_RED VRL transfer to redundant
256 STATXFER_VRL_MAN VRL transfer to manual
257 STATXFER_MEL_RED MEL transfer to redundant

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 135

Coil Variable Description


258 STATXFER_MEL_MAN MEL transfer to manual
259 STATXFER_UEL_RED UEL transfer to redundant
260 STATXFER_UEL_MAN UEL transfer to manual
261 STATXFER_GCL_RED GCL transfer to redundant
262 STATXFER_GCL_MAN GCL transfer to manual
263 STATXFER_LOS_RED Loss of sensing transfer to redundant
264 STATXFER_LOS_MAN Loss of sensing transfer to manual
265 STATXFER_XFERDISABLE Transfer to redundant disabled
266 STATXFER_HMIXFERDIS Transfer to redundant via HMI disabled
267 STATXFER_REDNOTRDY Channel not ready for transfer (not ready to accept
control)
268 Spare1
269 Spare2
270 Spare3
271 Spare4
272 Spare5
273 STATALRM_41A_FLCLS 41A failed to close alarm
274 STATALRM_41A_FLOPN 41A failed to open alarm
275 STATALRM_FLD_FLSH Failed to field flash alarm
276 STATALRM_LOS Loss of voltage sensing alarm
277 STATALRM_REGPTFL Loss of regulator PT
278 STATALRM_METPTFL Loss of metering PT
279 STATALRM_VOLT_UNBAL Phase unbalance voltage
280 STATALRM_CUR_UNBAL Phase unbalance of current
281 STATALRM_PSSCLP PSS output clipped at either minimum and maximum
limit alarm
282 STATALRM_PSAC Loss of AC powered power supply
283 STATALRM_PSDC Loss of DC powered power supply
284 STATALRM_MNFLDGND Main field, field to ground alarm
285 STATALRM_EXFLDGND Exciter field, field to ground alarm
286 STATALRM_PPT_TEMP PPT low-level over-temperature alarm
287 STATLARM_PPT_HITEMP PPT high-level over-temperature alarm
288 STATALRM_BRDGALM Bridge alarm (any)
289 STATALRM_BRDGTEMP Bridge over-temperature alarm
290 STATALRM_LBF Loss of both bridge cooling fans
291 STATALRM_USER1 User defined alarm status bit
292 STATARLM_USER2 User defined alarm status bit
293 STATARLM_USER3 User defined alarm status bit
294 Spare1
295 Spare2
296 Spare3
297 Spare4
298 Spare5

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


136 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


299 Spare6
300 Spare7
301 Spare8
302 Spare9
303 Spare10
304 Spare11
305 STATTRIP_OELG Generator field OEL tripped
306 STATTRIP_OELE Exciter field OEL tripped
307 STATTRIP_INST INST limiter tripped
308 STATTRIP_MFEL MFEL tripped
309 STATTRIP_OVL OVL tripped
310 STATTRIP_UVL UVL tripped
311 STATTRIP_HXL HXL tripped
312 STATTRIP_VRL VRL tripped
313 STATTRIP_MEL MEL tripped
314 STATTRIP_UEL UEL tripped
315 STATTRIP_GCL GCL tripped
316 STATTRIP_FLDCUR_XDCR Loss of field current transducer while in manual trip
317 STATTRIP_DX De-excitation module operated on fault trip
318 STATTRIP_CB Crowbar module operated trip
319 STATTRIP_OTEMP PPT over-temperature trip
320 STATTRIP_ESTOP Emergency stop (86) trip
321 STATTRIP_USER1 User defined trip
322 STATTRIP_USER2 User defined trip
323 STATTRIP_USER3 User defined trip
324 Spare1
325 Spare2
326 Spare3
327 Spare4
328 Spare5
329 Spare6
330 Spare7
331 Spare8
332 Spare9
333 Spare10
334 Spare11
335 Spare12
336 Spare13
1001 MBIN_COIL1001 State written to Modbus coil address 1001
1002 MBIN_COIL1002 State written to Modbus coil address 1002
1003 MBIN_COIL1003 State written to Modbus coil address 1003
1004 MBIN_COIL1004 State written to Modbus coil address 1004

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 137

Coil Variable Description


1005 MBIN_COIL1005 State written to Modbus coil address 1005
1006 MBIN_COIL1006 State written to Modbus coil address 1006
1007 MBIN_COIL1007 State written to Modbus coil address 1007
1008 MBIN_COIL1008 State written to Modbus coil address 1008
1009 MBIN_COIL1009 State written to Modbus coil address 1009
1010 MBIN_COIL1010 State written to Modbus coil address 1010
1011 MBIN_COIL1011 State written to Modbus coil address 1011
1012 MBIN_COIL1012 State written to Modbus coil address 1012
1013 MBIN_COIL1013 State written to Modbus coil address 1013
1014 MBIN_COIL1014 State written to Modbus coil address 1014
1015 MBIN_COIL1015 State written to Modbus coil address 1015
1016 MBIN_COIL1016 State written to Modbus coil address 1016
1017 MBIN_COIL1017 State written to Modbus coil address 1017
1018 MBIN_COIL1018 State written to Modbus coil address 1018
1019 MBIN_COIL1019 State written to Modbus coil address 1019
1020 MBIN_COIL1020 State written to Modbus coil address 1020
1021 MBIN_COIL1021 State written to Modbus coil address 1021
1022 MBIN_COIL1022 State written to Modbus coil address 1022
1023 MBIN_COIL1023 State written to Modbus coil address 1023
1024 MBIN_COIL1024 State written to Modbus coil address 1024
1025 MBIN_COIL1025 State written to Modbus coil address 1025
1026 MBIN_COIL1026 State written to Modbus coil address 1026
1027 MBIN_COIL1027 State written to Modbus coil address 1027
1028 MBIN_COIL1028 State written to Modbus coil address 1028
1029 MBIN_COIL1029 State written to Modbus coil address 1029
1030 MBIN_COIL1030 State written to Modbus coil address 1030
1031 MBIN_COIL1031 State written to Modbus coil address 1031
1032 MBIN_COIL1032 State written to Modbus coil address 1032
1033 MBIN_COIL1033 State written to Modbus coil address 1033
1034 MBIN_COIL1034 State written to Modbus coil address 1034
1035 MBIN_COIL1035 State written to Modbus coil address 1035
1036 MBIN_COIL1036 State written to Modbus coil address 1036
1037 MBIN_COIL1037 State written to Modbus coil address 1037
1038 MBIN_COIL1038 State written to Modbus coil address 1038
1039 MBIN_COIL1039 State written to Modbus coil address 1039
1040 MBIN_COIL1040 State written to Modbus coil address 1040
1041 MBIN_COIL1041 State written to Modbus coil address 1041
1042 MBIN_COIL1042 State written to Modbus coil address 1042
1043 MBIN_COIL1043 State written to Modbus coil address 1043
1044 MBIN_COIL1044 State written to Modbus coil address 1044
1045 MBIN_COIL1045 State written to Modbus coil address 1045
1046 MBIN_COIL1046 State written to Modbus coil address 1046

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


138 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1047 MBIN_COIL1047 State written to Modbus coil address 1047
1048 MBIN_COIL1048 State written to Modbus coil address 1048
1049 MBIN_COIL1049 State written to Modbus coil address 1049
1050 MBIN_COIL1050 State written to Modbus coil address 1050
1051 MBIN_COIL1051 State written to Modbus coil address 1051
1052 MBIN_COIL1052 State written to Modbus coil address 1052
1053 MBIN_COIL1053 State written to Modbus coil address 1053
1054 MBIN_COIL1054 State written to Modbus coil address 1054
1055 MBIN_COIL1055 State written to Modbus coil address 1055
1056 MBIN_COIL1056 State written to Modbus coil address 1056
1057 MBIN_COIL1057 State written to Modbus coil address 1057
1058 MBIN_COIL1058 State written to Modbus coil address 1058
1059 MBIN_COIL1059 State written to Modbus coil address 1059
1060 MBIN_COIL1060 State written to Modbus coil address 1060
1061 MBIN_COIL1061 State written to Modbus coil address 1061
1062 MBIN_COIL1062 State written to Modbus coil address 1062
1063 MBIN_COIL1063 State written to Modbus coil address 1063
1064 MBIN_COIL1064 State written to Modbus coil address 1064

Controller #1 Modbus™ Holding Registers


Tables B-5 through B-7 list the Modbus holding registers for Controller #1. The same holding registers are
used for Controllers #3 and #5 (when present).
Table 25. Analog Inputs (Controller #1 Modbus Holding Registers)
Register Variable Description
40001 PMIN_01 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40001 and
40002 40002
40003 PMIN_02 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40003 and
40004 40004
40005 PMIN_03 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40005 and
40006 40006
40007 PMIN_04 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40007 and
40008 40008
40009 PMIN_05 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40009 and
40010 40010
40011 PMIN_06 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40011 and
40012 40012
40013 PMIN_07 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40013 and
40014 40014
40015 PMIN_08 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40015 and
40016 40016
40017 PMIN_09 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40017 and
40018 40018
40019 PMIN_10 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40019 and
40020 40020

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 139

Register Variable Description


40021 PMIN_11 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40021 and
40022 40022
40023 PMIN_12 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40023 and
40024 40024
40025 PMIN_13 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40025 and
40026 40026
40027 PMIN_14 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40027 and
40028 40028
40029 PMIN_15 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40029 and
40030 40030
40031 PMIN_16 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40031 and
40032 40032
40033 PMIN_17 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40033 and
40034 40034
40035 PMIN_18 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40035 and
40036 40036
40037 PMIN_19 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40037 and
40038 40038
40039 PMIN_20 Value written to Modbus holding registers 40039 and
40040 40040

Table 26. Analog Outputs (Controller #1 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40041 PMOUT_P21 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40041 and
40042 40042
40043 PMOUT_P22 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40043 and
40044 40044
40045 PMOUT_P23 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40045 and
40046 40046
40047 PMOUT_P24 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40047 and
40048 40048
40049 PMOUT_P25 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40049 and
40050 40050
40051 PMOUT_P26 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40051 and
40052 40052
40053 PMOUT_P27 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40053 and
40054 40054
40055 PMOUT_P28 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40055 and
40056 40056
40057 PMOUT_P29 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40057 and
40058 40058
40059 PMOUT_P30 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40059 and
40060 40060
40061 PMOUT_P31 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40061 and
40062 40062
40063 PMOUT_P32 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40063 and
40064 40064
40065 PMOUT_P33 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40065 and
40066 40066
40067 PMOUT_P34 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40067 and
40068 40068

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


140 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40069 PMOUT_P35 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40069 and
40070 40070
40071 PMOUT_P36 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40071 and
40072 40072
40073 PMOUT_P37 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40073 and
40074 40074
40075 PMOUT_P38 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40075 and
40076 40076
40077 PMOUT_P39 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40077 and
40078 40078
40079 PMOUT_P40 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40079 and
40080 40080
40081 PMOUT_P41 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40081 and
40082 40082
40083 PMOUT_P42 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40083 and
40084 40084
40085 PMOUT_P43 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40085 and
40086 40086
40087 PMOUT_P44 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40087 and
40088 40088
40089 PMOUT_P45 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40089 and
40090 40090
40091 PMOUT_P46 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40091 and
40092 40092
40093 PMOUT_P47 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40093 and
40094 40094
40095 PMOUT_P48 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40095 and
40096 40096
40097 PMOUT_P49 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40097 and
40098 40098
40099 PMOUT_P50 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40099 and
40100 40100
40101 PMOUT_P51 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40101 and
40102 40102
40103 PMOUT_P52 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40103 and
40104 40104
40105 PMOUT_P53 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40105 and
40106 40106
40107 PMOUT_P54 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40107 and
40108 40108
40109 PMOUT_P55 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40109 and
40110 40110
40111 PMOUT_P56 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40111 and
40112 40112
40113 PMOUT_P57 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40113 and
40114 40114
40115 PMOUT_P58 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40115 and
40116 40116
40117 PMOUT_P59 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40117 and
40118 40118

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 141

Register Variable Description


40119 PMOUT_P60 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40119 and
40120 40120
40121 PMOUT_P61 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40121 and
40122 40122
40123 PMOUT_P62 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40123 and
40124 40124
40125 PMOUT_P63 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40125 and
40126 40126
40127 PMOUT_P64 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40127 and
40128 40128
40129 PMOUT_P65 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40129 and
40130 40130
40131 PMOUT_P66 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40131 and
40132 40132
40133 PMOUT_P67 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40133 and
40134 40134
40135 PMOUT_P68 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40135 and
40136 40136
40137 PMOUT_P69 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40137 and
40138 40138
40139 PMOUT_P70 Value available at Modbus holding registers 40139 and
40140 40140

Table 27. Metering Blocks (Controller #1 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40141 METGEN_VOLTAGE Per unit generator voltage magnitude
40142
40143 METGEN_CURRENT Per unit generator current magnitude
40144
40145 METGEN_MW Generator mega-Watt magnitude
40146
40147 METGEN_MVAR Generator mega-VAR magnitude
40148
40149 METGEN_MVA Generator mega-VA magnitude
40150
40151 METGEN_PF Generator power factor
40152
40153 METGEN_FREQ Generator frequency
40154
40155 METGEN_BASEVOLT Generator per-unit base voltage
40156
40157 METGEN_BASECUR Generator per-unit base current
40158
40159 METGEN_BASEMVA Generator pre-unit base MVA
40160
40161 Spare1
40162
40163 Spare2
40164
40165 Spare3
40166

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


142 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40167 Spare4
40168
40169 Spare5
40170
40171 Spare6
40172
40173 METMNFLD_VOLT Per unit main field voltage magnitude
40174
40175 METMNFLD_CURRENT Per unit main field current magnitude
40176
40177 METMNFLD_TEMP Main field temperature
40178
40179 METMNFLD_RES Calculated main field resistance
40180
40181 METMNFLD_GNDRESMIN Calculated maximum main field to ground resistance
40182
40183 METMNFLD_GNDREDMAX Calculated minimum main field to ground resistance
40184
40185 METMNFLD_BASEVOLT Main field per-unit base voltage
40186
40187 METMNFLD_BASECUR Main field per-unit base current
40188
40189 METEXFLD_VOLT Per unit exciter field voltage magnitude
40190
40191 METEXFLD_CURRENT Per unit exciter field current magnitude
40192
40193 METEXFLD_TEMP Exciter field temperature
40194
40195 METEXFLD_RES Calculated exciter field resistance
40196
40197 METEXFLD_GNDRESMIN Calculated maximum exciter field to ground resistance
40198
40199 METEXFLD_GNDREDMAX Calculated minimum exciter field to ground resistance
40200
40201 METEXFLD_BASEVOLT Exciter field per-unit base voltage
40202
40203 METEXFLD_BASECUR Exciter field per-unit base current
40204
40205 METADJ_ACREF Reference level of AC voltage adjuster
40206
40207 METADJ_ACPOS Travel (position) indication of AC voltage adjuster
40208
40209 METADJ_ACERR Error signal of AC voltage regulator
40210
40211 METADJ_MANREF Reference level of Manual adjuster
40212
40213 METADJ_MANPOS Travel (position) indication of manual adjuster
40214
40215 METADJ_MANERR Error signal of manual regulator
40216

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 143

Register Variable Description


40217 METADJ_VARREF Reference level of VAR adjuster
40218
40219 METADJ_VARPOS Travel (position) indication of VAR adjuster
40220
40221 METADJ_VARERR Error signal of VAR controller (or regulator)
40222
40223 METADJ_PFREF Reference level of PF adjuster
40224
40225 METADJ_PFPOS Travel (position) indication of PR adjuster
40226
40227 METADJ_PFERR Error signal of PR controller (or regulator)
40228
40229 METADJ_AMBAL Difference between operating points of Manual and Auto
40230 control modes
40231 METADJ_TRKERR Difference between operating points of Main and
40232 Redundant control channels
40233 Spare1
40234
40235 Spare2
40236
40237 METLIM_OEL1_OUT Per unit output of exciter field OEL block
40238
40239 METLIM_OEL2_OUT Per unit output of generator field OEL block
40240
40241 METLIM_INS_OUT Per unit output of INS block
40242
40243 METLIM_MFEL_OUT Per unit output of MFEL block
40244
40245 METLIM_HXL_OUT Per unit output of HXL block
40246
40247 METLIM_OVL_OUT Per unit output of OVL block
40248
40249 METLIMT_UVL_OUT Per unit output of UVL block
40250
40251 METLIM_UEL_OUT Per unit output of UEL block
40252
40253 METLIM_MEL_OUT Per unit output of MEL block
40254
40255 METLIM_GCL_OUT Per unit output of GCL block
40256
40257 METLIM_VRL_OUT Per unit output of VRL block
40258
40259 METLIM_PSS_OUT Per unit output of PSS block
40260
40261 METLIM_PSS_DELTA_SPD Delta speed input to PSS
40262
40263 METLIM_PSS_COMP_SPD Compensated speed signal for PSS
40264
40265 METLIM_COMPTEMP Cooling air temperature used to compensate various
40266 limiters

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


144 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40267 METLIM_COMPPRES Hydrogen pressure level used to compensate various
40268 limiters
40269 METSYNC_GENVOLT Per unit generator voltage magnitude
40270
40271 METSYNC_GENFREQ Generator frequency
40272
40273 METSYNC_BUSVOLT Per unit bus voltage magnitude
40274
40275 METSYNC_BUSFREQ Bus frequency
40276
40277 METSYNC_VOLTDIF Difference between bus and generator voltage (=
40278 BUSVOLT-GENVOLT)
40279 METSYNC_SPDDIF Difference between generator and bus frequency (=
40280 BUSFREQ-GENFREQ)
40281 METSYNC_PHSDIF Difference between generator and bus voltage phase
40282 angle (=BUS_angle-GEN_ angle)
40283 Spare1
40284
40285 METPPT_VOLT Per unit PPT secondary voltage magnitude
40286
40287 METPPT_PRICUR Per unit PPT primary current magnitude
40288
40289 METPPT_SECCUR Per unit PPT secondary current magnitude
40290
40291 METPPT_AVGTEMP PPT average winding temperature
40292
40293 METPPT_PHATEMP PPT phase-A winding temperature
40294
40295 METPPT_PHBTEMP PPT phase-B winding temperature
40296
40297 METPPT_PHCTEMP PPT phase-C winding temperature
40298
40299 METPPT_BASEVOLT Exciter PPT per-unit base voltage
40300
40301 METPPT_BASEPRICUR Exciter PPT per-unit base primary current
40302
40303 METPPT_BASESECCUR Exciter PPT per-unit base secondary current
40304
40305 Spare1
40306
40307 Spare2
40308
40309 Spare3
40310
40311 Spare4
40312
40313 Spare5
40314
40315 Spare6
40316

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 145

Register Variable Description


40317 METGSU_VOLT Per unit generator step-up transformer voltage
40318 magnitude
40319 METGSU_CUR Per unit generator step-up transformer current
40320 magnitude
40321 METGSU_MW Generator step-up transformer mega-Watt magnitude
40322
40323 METGSU_MVAR Generator step-up transformer mega-VAR magnitude
40324
40325 METGSU_MVA Generator step-up transformer mega-VA magnitude
40326
40327 METGSU_PF Generator step-up transformer power factor
40328
40329 METGSU_FREQ Generator step-up transformer frequency
40330
40331 METGSU_BASEVOLT Generator step-up transformer per-unit base voltage
40332
40333 METGSU_BASECUR Generator step-up transformer per-unit base current
40334
40335 METGSU_BASEMVA Generator step-up transformer pre-unit base MVA
40336
40337 Spare1
40338
40339 Spare2
40340
40341 Spare3
40342
40343 Spare4
40344
40345 Spare5
40346
40347 Spare6
40348
40349 METOTHER_REGPTMAG Per unit voltage magnitude of “regulator” PT inputs
40350
40351 METOTHER_METPTMAG Per unit voltage magnitude of “metering” PT inputs
40352
40353 METOTHER_REGOUT Control signal of active regulator mode
40354
40355 METOTHER_PIDINPUT Error signal applied to input of main PID control loop
40356
40357 METOTHER_FIRCMD Firing command
40358
40359 METOTHER_PHAPTDIF Difference between phase-A voltage input and average
40360 voltage signal
40361 METOTHER_PHBPTDIF Difference between phase-B voltage input and average
40362 voltage signal
40363 METOTHER_PHCPTDIF Difference between phase-C voltage input and average
40364 voltage signal
40365 METOTHER_PHACTDIF Difference between phase-A current input and average
40366 current signal

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


146 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40367 METOTHER_PHBCTDIF Difference between phase-B current input and average
40368 current signal
40369 METOTHER_PHCCTDIF Difference between phase-C current input and average
40370 current signal
40371 METOTHER_USER1 User defined metering signal
40372
40373 METOTHER_USER2 User defined metering signal
40374
40375 METOTHER_USER3 User defined metering signal
40376
40377 Spare1
40378
40379 Spare2
40380
41001 MBIN_1001 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41001 and
41002 41002
41001 MBIN_1001 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41001 and
41002 41002
41003 MBIN_1002 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41003 and
41004 41004
41005 MBIN_1003 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41005 and
41006 41006
41007 MBIN_1004 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41007 and
41008 41008
41009 MBIN_1005 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41009 and
41010 41010
41011 MBIN_1006 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41011 and
41012 41012
41013 MBIN_1007 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41013 and
41014 41014
41015 MBIN_1008 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41015 and
41016 41016
41017 MBIN_1009 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41017 and
41018 41018
41019 MBIN_1010 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41019 and
41020 41020
41021 MBIN_1011 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41021 and
41022 41022
41023 MBIN_1012 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41023 and
41024 41024
41025 MBIN_1013 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41025 and
41026 41026
41027 MBIN_1014 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41027 and
41028 41028
41029 MBIN_1015 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41029 and
41030 41030
41031 MBIN_1016 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41031 and
41032 41032
41033 MBIN_1017 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41033 and
41034 41034

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 147

Register Variable Description


41035 MBIN_1018 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41035 and
41036 41036
41037 MBIN_1019 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41037 and
41038 41038
41039 MBIN_1020 Value written to Modbus holding registers 41039 and
41040 41040

Controller #2 Modbus™ Coil Map


Tables B-8 through B-24 list the Modbus coil map for Controller #2. The same coil map is used for
Controllers #4 and #6 (when present).
Table 28. Field Transducer Input Block (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)
Coil Variable Description
001-048 SPARE
049 BRG8_LINK_ALM Bridge 8 fiber optic link alarm
050 BRG9_LINK_ALM Bridge 9 fiber optic link alarm
051 BRGA_LINK_ALM Bridge A fiber optic link alarm
052 BRGB_LINK_ALM Bridge B fiber optic link alarm
053 BRGC_LINK_ALM Bridge C fiber optic link alarm
054 BRGD_LINK_ALM Bridge D fiber optic link alarm
055 BRGE_LINK_ALM Bridge E fiber optic link alarm
056 BRGF_LINK_ALM Bridge F fiber optic link alarm
057 BRG0_LINK_ALM Bridge 0 fiber optic link alarm
058 BRG1_LINK_ALM Bridge 1 fiber optic link alarm
059 BRG2_LINK_ALM Bridge 2 fiber optic link alarm
060 BRG3_LINK_ALM Bridge 3 fiber optic link alarm
061 BRG4_LINK_ALM Bridge 4 fiber optic link alarm
062 BRG5_LINK_ALM Bridge 5 fiber optic link alarm
063 BRG6_LINK_ALM Bridge 6 fiber optic link alarm
064 BRG7_LINK_ALM Bridge 7 fiber optic link alarm
065 FLDTRN_F7_BAD FLDTRN: U35 counter out of range
066 FLDTRN_F6_BAD FLDTRN: U29 counter out of range
067 FLDTRN_F5_BAD FLDTRN: U31 counter out of range
068 FLDTRN_F4_BAD FLDTRN: U27 counter out of range
069 FLDTRN_F3_BAD FLDTRN: U28 counter out of range
070 FLDTRN_F2_BAD FLDTRN: U19 counter out of range
071 FLDTRN_F1_BAD FLDTRN: U22 counter out of range
072 PLL_NOT_LOCKED PLL not locked
073-077 SPARE
078 FLDTRN_F10_BAD FLDTRN: U38 counter out of range
079 FLDTRN_F9_BAD FLDTRN: U39 counter out of range
080 FLDTRN_F8_BAD FLDTRN: U33 counter out of range
081-128 SPARE

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


148 9411300990 Rev C

Table 29. Bridge 0 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
129 SPARE
130 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
131 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
132 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
133 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
134 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
135 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
136 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
137-140 SPARE
141 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
142 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
143 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
144 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
145 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
146 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
147 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
148 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
149 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
150 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
151 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
152 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
153 CSAN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
154 CSAP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
155 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
156 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
157 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
158 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
159 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
160 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
161 BAD_SS: BAD STATE SELECT INPUT
162 CSLINEC: C PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
163 CSLINEB: B PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
164 CSLINEA: A PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
165 CSCN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
166 CSCP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
167 CSBN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 149

Coil Variable Description


168 CSBP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B POSITVE NOT
CONDUCTING
169 SCRAN_LTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
170 SCRAP_HTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
171 SCRAP_LTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
172 AIRTHI: BRIDGE AIR TEMPERATURE IS TOO HI
173 FAN_FB_ALM: FAN FEED BACK NOT PRESENT
174 LOSS OF COOLING HEATSINKS ABOVE LOW THRESHOLD AND AIR
ABOVE THRESHOLD
175 SPARE
176 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB BRIDGE IS TRIPPED - THIS BIT MUST BE CLEARED
TO RUN AGAIN
177 SCRCN_LTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
178 SCRCP_HTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
179 SCRCP_LTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
180 SCRBN_HTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
181 SCRBN_LTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
182 SCRBP_HTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
183 SCRBP_LTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
184 SCRAN_HTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
185 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 IS OPEN
186 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 IS SHORT
187 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 IS OPEN
188 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 IS SHORT
189 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 IS OPEN
190 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 IS SHORT
191 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 IS OPEN
192 SCRCN_HTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
193 BRG_LINK_ALARM: BRIDGE LINK BAD
194 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 IS SHORT
195 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 IS OPEN
196 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 IS SHORT
197 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 IS OPEN
198 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 IS SHORT
199 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 IS OPEN
200 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 IS OPEN
201 SPARE:
202 FUSE_LC OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE C
203 FUSE_LB OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE B
204 FUSE_LA OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE A
205 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
206 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


150 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


207 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
208 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
209 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
210 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
211 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
212 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
213 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
214 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
215-224 SPARE:

Table 30. Bridge 1 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
225 SPARE
226 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
227 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
228 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
229 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
230 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
231 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
232 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
233-236 SPARE
237 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
238 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
239 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
240 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
241 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
242 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
243 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
244 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
245 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
246 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
247 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
248 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
249 CSAN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
250 CSAP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
251 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
252 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
253 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 151

Coil Variable Description


254 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
255 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
256 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
257 BAD_SS: BAD STATE SELECT INPUT
258 CSLINEC: C PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
259 CSLINEB: B PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
260 CSLINEA: A PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
261 CSCN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
262 CSCP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
263 CSBN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
264 CSBP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B POSITVE NOT
CONDUCTING
265 SCRAN_LTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
266 SCRAP_HTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
267 SCRAP_LTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
268 AIRTHI: BRIDGE AIR TEMPERATURE IS TOO HI
269 FAN_FB_ALM: FAN FEED BACK NOT PRESENT
270 LOSS OF COOLING HEATSINKS ABOVE LOW THRESHOLD AND AIR
ABOVE THRESHOLD
271 SPARE
272 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB BRIDGE IS TRIPPED - THIS BIT MUST BE CLEARED
TO RUN AGAIN
273 SCRCN_LTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
274 SCRCP_HTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
275 SCRCP_LTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
276 SCRBN_HTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
277 SCRBN_LTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
278 SCRBP_HTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
279 SCRBP_LTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
280 SCRAN_HTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
281 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 IS OPEN
282 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 IS SHORT
283 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 IS OPEN
284 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 IS SHORT
285 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 IS OPEN
286 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 IS SHORT
287 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 IS OPEN
288 SCRCN_HTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
289 BRG_LINK_ALARM: BRIDGE LINK BAD
290 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 IS SHORT
291 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 IS OPEN

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


152 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


292 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 IS SHORT
293 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 IS OPEN
294 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 IS SHORT
295 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 IS OPEN
296 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 IS OPEN
297 spare
298 FUSE_LC OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE C
299 FUSE_LB OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE B
300 FUSE_LA OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE A
301 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
302 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
303 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
304 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
305 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
306 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
307 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
308 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
309 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
310 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
311-320 SPARE:

Table 31. Bridge 2 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
321 SPARE
322 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
323 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
324 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
325 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
326 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
327 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
328 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
329-332 SPARE
333 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
334 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
335 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
336 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
337 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
338 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
339 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 153

Coil Variable Description


340 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
341 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
342 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
343 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
344 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
345 CSAN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
346 CSAP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
347 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
348 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
349 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
350 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
351 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
352 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
353 BAD_SS: BAD STATE SELECT INPUT
354 CSLINEC: C PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
355 CSLINEB: B PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
356 CSLINEA: A PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
357 CSCN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
358 CSCP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
359 CSBN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
360 CSBP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B POSITVE NOT
CONDUCTING
361 SCRAN_LTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
362 SCRAP_HTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
363 SCRAP_LTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
364 AIRTHI: BRIDGE AIR TEMPERATURE IS TOO HI
365 FAN_FB_ALM: FAN FEED BACK NOT PRESENT
366 LOSS OF COOLING HEATSINKS ABOVE LOW THRESHOLD AND AIR
ABOVE THRESHOLD
367 SPARE
368 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB BRIDGE IS TRIPPED - THIS BIT MUST BE CLEARED
TO RUN AGAIN
369 SCRCN_LTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
370 SCRCP_HTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
371 SCRCP_LTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
372 SCRBN_HTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
373 SCRBN_LTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
374 SCRBP_HTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
375 SCRBP_LTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


154 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


376 SCRAN_HTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
377 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 IS OPEN
378 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 IS SHORT
379 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 IS OPEN
380 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 IS SHORT
381 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 IS OPEN
382 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 IS SHORT
383 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 IS OPEN
384 SCRCN_HTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
385 BRG_LINK_ALARM: BRIDGE LINK BAD
386 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 IS SHORT
387 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 IS OPEN
388 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 IS SHORT
389 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 IS OPEN
390 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 IS SHORT
391 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 IS OPEN
392 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 IS OPEN
393 spare
394 FUSE_LC OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE C
395 FUSE_LB OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE B
396 FUSE_LA OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE A
397 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
398 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
399 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
400 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
401 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
402 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
403 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
404 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
405 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
406 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
407-416 SPARE:

Table 32. Bridge 3 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
417 SPARE
418 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
419 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
420 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
421 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 155

Coil Variable Description


422 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
423 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
424 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
425-428 SPARE
429 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
430 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
431 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
432 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
433 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
434 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
435 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
436 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
437 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
438 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
439 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
440 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
441 CSAN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
442 CSAP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
443 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
444 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
445 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
446 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
447 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
448 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
449 BAD_SS: BAD STATE SELECT INPUT
450 CSLINEC: C PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
451 CSLINEB: B PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
452 CSLINEA: A PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
453 CSCN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
454 CSCP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE C POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
455 CSBN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
456 CSBP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE B POSITVE NOT
CONDUCTING
457 SCRAN_LTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
458 SCRAP_HTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
459 SCRAP_LTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
460 AIRTHI: BRIDGE AIR TEMPERATURE IS TOO HI

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


156 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


461 FAN_FB_ALM: FAN FEED BACK NOT PRESENT
462 LOSS OF COOLING HEATSINKS ABOVE LOW THRESHOLD AND AIR
ABOVE THRESHOLD
463 SPARE
464 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB BRIDGE IS TRIPPED - THIS BIT MUST BE CLEARED
TO RUN AGAIN
465 SCRCN_LTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
466 SCRCP_HTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
467 SCRCP_LTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
468 SCRBN_HTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
469 SCRBN_LTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
470 SCRBP_HTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
471 SCRBP_LTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
472 SCRAN_HTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
473 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 IS OPEN
474 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 IS SHORT
475 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 IS OPEN
476 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 IS SHORT
477 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 IS OPEN
478 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 IS SHORT
479 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 IS OPEN
480 SCRCN_HTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
481 BRG_LINK_ALARM: BRIDGE LINK BAD
482 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 IS SHORT
483 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 IS OPEN
484 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 IS SHORT
485 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 IS OPEN
486 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 IS SHORT
487 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 IS OPEN
488 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 IS OPEN
489 spare
490 FUSE_LC OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE C
491 FUSE_LB OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE B
492 FUSE_LA OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE A
493 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
494 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
495 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
496 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 BLOCK HAS NO INPUT FROM
TRANSDUCER (IT CARD)
497 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
498 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 157

Coil Variable Description


499 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
500 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
501 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
502 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
503-513 SPARE:

Table 33. Bridge 4 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
513 SPARE
514 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
515 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
516 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
517 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
518 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
519 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
520 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
521-524 SPARE
525 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
526 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
527 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
528 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
529 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
530 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
531 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
532 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
533 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
534 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
535 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
536 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
537 CSAN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
538 CSAP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
539 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
540 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
541 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
542 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
543 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
544 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
545 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
546 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


158 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


547 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
548 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
549 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
550 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
551 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
552 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
553 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
554 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
555 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
556 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
557 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
558 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
559 SPARE
560 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
561 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
562 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
563 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
564 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
565 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
566 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
567 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
568 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
569 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
570 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is short
571 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
572 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is short
573 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
574 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is short
575 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
576 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
577 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
578 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
579 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
580 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
581 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
582 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
583 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
584 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
585 spare
586 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
587 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
588 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 159

Coil Variable Description


589 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
590 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
591 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
592 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
593 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
594 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
595 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
596 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
597 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
598 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
599-608 SPARE:

Table 34. Bridge 5 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
609 SPARE
610 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
611 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
612 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
613 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
614 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
615 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
616 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
617-620 SPARE
621 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
622 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
623 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
624 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
625 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
626 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
627 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
628 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
629 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
630 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
631 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
632 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
633 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
634 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
635 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
636 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
637 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
638 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


160 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


639 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
640 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
641 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
642 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
643 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
644 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
645 CSCN: conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
646 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
647 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
648 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
649 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
650 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
651 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
652 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
653 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
654 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
655 SPARE
656 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
657 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
658 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
659 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
660 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
661 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
662 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
663 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
664 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
665 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
666 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
667 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
668 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
669 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
670 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
671 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
672 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
673 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
674 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
675 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
676 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
677 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
678 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
679 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
680 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 161

Coil Variable Description


681
682 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
683 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
684 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
685 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
686 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
687 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
688 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
689 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
690 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
691 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
692 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
693 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
694 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
695-704 SPARE:

Table 35. Bridge 6 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
705 SPARE
706 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
707 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
708 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
709 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
710 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
711 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
712 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
713-716 SPARE
717 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
718 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
719 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
720 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
721 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
722 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
723 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
724 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
725 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
726 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
727 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
728 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
729 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
730 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


162 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


731 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
732 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
733 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
734 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
735 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
736 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
737 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
738 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
739 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
740 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
741 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
742 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
743 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
744 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
745 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
746 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
747 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
748 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
749 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
750 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
751 SPARE
752 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
753 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
754 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
755 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
756 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
757 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
758 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
759 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
760 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
761 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
762 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
763 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
764 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
765 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
766 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
767 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
768 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
769 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
770 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
771 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
772 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 163

Coil Variable Description


773 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
774 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
775 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
776 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
777 spare
778 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
779 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
780 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
781 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
782 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
783 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
784 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
785 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
786 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
787 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
788 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
789 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
790 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
791-800 SPARE:

Table 36. Bridge 7 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
801 SPARE
802 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
803 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
804 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
805 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
806 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
807 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
808 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
809-812 SPARE
813 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
814 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
815 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
816 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
817 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
818 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
819 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
820 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
821 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
822 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


164 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


823 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
824 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
825 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
826 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
827 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
828 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
829 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
830 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
831 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
832 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
833 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
834 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
835 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
836 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
837 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
838 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
839 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
840 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
841 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
842 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
843 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
844 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
845 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
846 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
847 SPARE
848 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
849 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
850 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
851 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
852 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
853 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
854 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
855 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
856 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
857 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
858 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
859 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
860 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
861 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
862 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
863 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
864 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 165

Coil Variable Description


865 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
866 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
867 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
868 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
869 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
870 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
871 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
872 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
873 spare
874 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
875 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
876 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
877 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
878 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
879 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
880 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
881 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
882 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
883 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
884 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
885 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
886 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
887-896 SPARE:

Table 37. Bridge 8 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
897 SPARE
898 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
899 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
900 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
901 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
902 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
903 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
904 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
905-908 SPARE
909 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
910 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
911 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
912 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
913 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
914 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


166 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


915 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
916 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
917 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
918 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
919 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
920 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
921 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
922 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
923 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
924 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
925 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
926 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
927 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
928 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
929 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
930 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
931 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
932 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
933 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
934 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
935 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
936 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
937 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
938 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
939 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
940 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
941 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
942 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
943 SPARE
944 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
945 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
946 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
947 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
948 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
949 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
950 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
951 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
952 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
953 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
954 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
955 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 167

Coil Variable Description


956 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
957 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
958 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
959 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
960 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
961 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
962 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
963 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
964 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
965 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
966 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
967 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
968 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
969 spare
970 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
971 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
972 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
973 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
974 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
975 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
976 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
977 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
978 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
979 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
980 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
981 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
982 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
983-992 SPARE:

Table 38. Bridge 9 (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
993 SPARE
994 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
995 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
996 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
997 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
998 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
999 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
1000 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
1001- SPARE
1004
1005 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
1006 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


168 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1007 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
1008 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
1009 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
1010 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
1011 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
1012 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
1013 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
1014 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
1015 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
1016 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
1017 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
1018 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
1019 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
1020 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
1021 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
1022 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
1023 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
1024 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
1025 BAD_SS: bad state select input
1026 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
1027 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
1028 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
1029 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
1030 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
1031 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
1032 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
1033 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1034 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1035 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
1036 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
1037 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
1038 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
1039 SPARE
1040 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
1041 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
1042 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1043 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
1044 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1045 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
1046 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 169

Coil Variable Description


1047 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
1048 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1049 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
1050 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
1051 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
1052 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
1053 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
1054 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
1055 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
1056 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1057 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
1058 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
1059 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
1060 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
1061 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
1062 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
1063 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
1064 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
1065
1066 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
1067 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
1068 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
1069 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1070 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1071 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1072 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1073 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
1074 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
1075 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
1076 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
1077 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
1078 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
1079- SPARE:
1088

Table 39. Bridge A (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
1089 SPARE
1090 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
1091 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
1092 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
1093 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
1094 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


170 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1095 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
1096 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
1097- SPARE
1100
1101 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
1102 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
1103 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
1104 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
1105 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
1106 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
1107 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
1108 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
1109 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
1110 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
1111 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
1112 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
1113 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
1114 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
1115 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
1116 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
1117 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
1118 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
1119 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
1120 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
1121 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
1122 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
1123 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
1124 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
1125 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
1126 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
1127 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
1128 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
1129 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1130 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1131 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
1132 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
1133 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
1134 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
1135 SPARE
1136 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
1137 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 171

Coil Variable Description


1138 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1139 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
1140 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1141 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
1142 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1143 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
1144 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1145 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
1146 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
1147 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
1148 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
1149 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
1150 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
1151 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
1152 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1153 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
1154 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
1155 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
1156 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
1157 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
1158 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
1159 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
1160 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
1161 spare
1162 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
1163 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
1164 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
1165 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1166 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1167 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1168 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1169 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
1170 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
1171 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
1172 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
1173 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
1174 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
1175- SPARE:
1184

Table 40. Bridge B (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
1185 SPARE

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


172 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1186 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
1187 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
1188 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
1189 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
1190 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
1191 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
1192 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
1193- SPARE
1196
1197 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
1198 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
1199 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
1200 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
1201 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
1202 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
1203 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
1204 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
1205 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
1206 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
1207 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
1208 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
1209 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
1210 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
1211 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
1212 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
1213 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
1214 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
1215 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
1216 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
1217 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
1218 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
1219 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
1220 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
1221 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
1222 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
1223 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
1224 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
1225 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1226 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1227 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
1228 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 173

Coil Variable Description


1229 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
1230 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
1231 SPARE
1232 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
1233 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
1234 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1235 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
1236 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1237 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
1238 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1239 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
1240 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1241 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
1242 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
1243 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
1244 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
1245 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
1246 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
1247 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
1248 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1249 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
1250 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
1251 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
1252 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
1253 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
1254 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
1255 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
1256 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
1257 spare
1258 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
1259 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
1260 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
1261 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1262 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1263 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1264 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1265 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
1266 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
1267 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
1268 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
1269 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
1270 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


174 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1271- SPARE:
1280

Table 41. Bridge C (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
1281 SPARE
1282 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
1283 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
1284 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
1285 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
1286 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
1287 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
1288 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
1289- SPARE
1292
1293 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
1294 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
1295 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
1296 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
1297 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
1298 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
1299 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
1300 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
1301 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
1302 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
1303 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
1304 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
1305 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
1306 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
1307 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
1308 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
1309 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
1310 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
1311 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
1312 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
1313 BAD_SS: bad state select input
1314 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
1315 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
1316 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
1317 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
1318 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 175

Coil Variable Description


1319 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
1320 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
1321 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1322 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1323 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
1324 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
1325 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
1326 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
1327 SPARE
1328 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
1329 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
1330 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1331 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
1332 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1333 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
1334 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1335 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
1336 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1337 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
1338 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
1339 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
1340 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
1341 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
1342 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
1343 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
1344 SCRCN_HTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1345 BRG_LINK_ALARM: Bridge link bad
1346 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
1347 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
1348 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
1349 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
1350 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
1351 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
1352 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
1353 spare
1354 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c
1355 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
1356 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
1357 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1358 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1359 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1360 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


176 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1361 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
1362 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
1363 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
1364 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
1365 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
1366 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
1367- SPARE:
1376

Table 42. Bridge D (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
1377 SPARE
1378 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
1379 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
1380 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
1381 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
1382 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
1383 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
1384 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
1385- SPARE
1388
1389 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
1390 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
1391 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
1392 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
1393 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
1394 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
1395 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
1396 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
1397 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
1398 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
1399 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
1400 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
1401 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
1402 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting
1403 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
1404 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
1405 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
1406 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
1407 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
1408 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 177

Coil Variable Description


1409 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
1410 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
1411 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
1412 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
1413 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
1414 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
1415 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
1416 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
1417 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1418 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1419 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase a positive heat sink low temp alarm
1420 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
1421 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feed back not present
1422 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
1423 SPARE
1424 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
1425 SCRCN_LTEMP: Phase c negative heat sink low temp alarm
1426 SCRCP_HTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1427 SCRCP_LTEMP: Phase c positive heat sink low temp alarm
1428 SCRBN_HTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink hi temp alarm
1429 SCRBN_LTEMP: Phase b negative heat sink low temp alarm
1430 SCRBP_HTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1431 SCRBP_LTEMP: Phase b positive heat sink low temp alarm
1432 SCRAN_HTEMP: Phase a negative heat sink low temp alarm
1433 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 is open
1434 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 is shorted
1435 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 is open
1436 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 is shorted
1437 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 is open
1438 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 is shorted
1439 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 is open
1440 SCRCN_HTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1441 BRG_LINK_ALARM: BRIDGE LINK BAD
1442 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 is shorted
1443 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 is open
1444 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 is shorted
1445 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 is open
1446 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 is shorted
1447 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 is open
1448 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 is open
1449
1450 FUSE_LC Open line or fuse phase c

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


178 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1451 FUSE_LB Open line or fuse phase b
1452 FUSE_LA Open line or fuse phase a
1453 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1454 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1455 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1456 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1457 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
1458 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
1459 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
1460 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
1461 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
1462 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
1463- SPARE:
1472

Table 43. Bridge E (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
1473 SPARE
1474 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
1475 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
1476 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
1477 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
1478 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
1479 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
1480 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
1481- SPARE
1484
1485 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
1486 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
1487 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
1488 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
1489 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
1490 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
1491 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
1492 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off
1493 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
1494 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
1495 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
1496 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
1497 CSAN: Conduction sensor phase a negative not conducting
1498 CSAP: Conduction sensor phase a positive not conducting

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 179

Coil Variable Description


1499 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
1500 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
1501 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
1502 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
1503 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
1504 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
1505 BAD_SS: Bad state select input
1506 CSLINEC: C phase conduction sensor failed
1507 CSLINEB: B phase conduction sensor failed
1508 CSLINEA: A phase conduction sensor failed
1509 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
1510 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
1511 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
1512 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
1513 SCRAN_LTEMP: Phase A negative heat sink low temp alarm
1514 SCRAP_HTEMP: Phase A positive heat sink hi temp alarm
1515 SCRAP_LTEMP: Phase A positive heat sink low temp alarm
1516 AIRTHI: Bridge air temperature is too hi
1517 FAN_FB_ALM: Fan feedback not present
1518 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
1519 SPARE
1520 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
1521 SCRCN_LTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1522 SCRCP_HTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1523 SCRCP_LTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1524 SCRBN_HTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1525 SCRBN_LTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1526 SCRBP_HTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1527 SCRBP_LTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1528 SCRAN_HTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1529 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 IS OPEN
1530 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 IS SHORT
1531 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 IS OPEN
1532 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 IS SHORT
1533 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 IS OPEN
1534 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 IS SHORT
1535 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 IS OPEN
1536 SCRCN_HTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1537 BRG_LINK_ALARM: BRIDGE LINK BAD
1538 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 IS SHORT
1539 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 IS OPEN
1540 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 IS SHORT

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


180 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1541 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 IS OPEN
1542 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 IS SHORT
1543 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 IS OPEN
1544 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 IS OPEN
1545 spare
1546 FUSE_LC OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE C
1547 FUSE_LB OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE B
1548 FUSE_LA OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE A
1549 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1550 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1551 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1552 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1553 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
1554 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
1555 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
1556 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
1557 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
1558 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
1559- SPARE:
1568

Table 44. Bridge F (Controller #2 Modbus Coil Map)


Coil Variable Description
1569 SPARE
1570 IN_EXECUTE_STATE:
1571 BRG_RUN_ENABLED: LATCH when ON_CMD received
1572 BRG_NOT_READY_FB: WORKING
1573 BRG_TRP_REQ_FB: LATCH for trip brg trip req
1574 BRG_TRP_FB: Bridge is tripped
1575 BRG_ALM_FB: Bridge has a alarm
1576 BRG_RUN_FB: Bridge is running
1577- SPARE
1580
1581 DIGIN_IN4_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 4
1582 DIGIN_IN3_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 3
1583 DIGIN_IN2_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 2
1584 DIGIN_IN1_FB: DIG_IN block feedbacks input 1
1585 BLKS_NOT_EXECUTING: Should be set in all states except exe and running
1586 IN_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and negative bridge current too big - self
clearing
1587 IP_NOT_ZERO: Bridge off and positive bridge current too big - self
clearing
1588 IBR_NOT_ZERO: Positive of Negative bridge current not zero with bridge
off

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 181

Coil Variable Description


1589 AC_STUCK_CLOSED: AC bridge breaker stuck closed - Latched
1590 AC_STUCK_OPEN: Ac bridge breaker stuck open - Latched
1591 DC_STUCK_CLOSED: DC breaker stuck closed - Latched
1592 DC_STUCK_OPEN: DC breaker stuck open - Latched
1593 CSAN: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A NEGATIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
1594 CSAP: CONDUCTION SENSOR PHASE A POSITIVE NOT
CONDUCTING
1595 SCRCN: SCR CN disabled on Hi Temp
1596 SCRCP: SCR CP disabled on Hi Temp
1597 SCRBN: SCR BN disabled on Hi Temp
1598 SCRBP: SCR BP disabled on Hi Temp
1599 SCRAN: SCR AN disabled on Hi Temp
1600 SCRAP: SCR AP disabled on Hi Temp
1601 BAD_SS: BAD STATE SELECT INPUT
1602 CSLINEC: C PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
1603 CSLINEB: B PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
1604 CSLINEA: A PHASE CONDUCTION SENSOR FAILED
1605 CSCN: Conduction sensor phase c negative not conducting
1606 CSCP: Conduction sensor phase c positive not conducting
1607 CSBN: Conduction sensor phase b negative not conducting
1608 CSBP: Conduction sensor phase b positve not conducting
1609 SCRAN_LTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1610 SCRAP_HTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1611 SCRAP_LTEMP: PHASE A POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1612 AIRTHI: BRIDGE AIR TEMPERATURE IS TOO HI
1613 FAN_FB_ALM: FAN FEED BACK NOT PRESENT
1614 LOSS OF COOLING Heatsinks above low threshold and air above threshold
1615 SPARE
1616 ALM_BRG_TRP_REQ_FB Bridge is tripped - this bit must be cleared to run again
1617 SCRCN_LTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1618 SCRCP_HTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1619 SCRCP_LTEMP: PHASE C POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1620 SCRBN_HTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1621 SCRBN_LTEMP: PHASE B NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1622 SCRBP_HTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1623 SCRBP_LTEMP: PHASE B POSITIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1624 SCRAN_HTEMP: PHASE A NEGATIVE HEAT SINK LOW TEMP ALARM
1625 RTD4_OPEN: RTD #4 IS OPEN
1626 RTD3_SHORT: RTD #3 IS SHORT
1627 RTD3_OPEN: RTD #3 IS OPEN
1628 RTD2_SHORT: RTD #2 IS SHORT
1629 RTD2_OPEN: RTD #2 IS OPEN

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


182 9411300990 Rev C

Coil Variable Description


1630 RTD1_SHORT: RTD #1 IS SHORT
1631 RTD1_OPEN: RTD #1 IS OPEN
1632 SCRCN_HTEMP: PHASE C NEGATIVE HEAT SINK HI TEMP ALARM
1633 BRG_LINK_ALARM: BRIDGE LINK BAD
1634 RTD7_SHORT: RTD #7 IS SHORT
1635 RTD7_OPEN: RTD #7 IS OPEN
1636 RTD6_SHORT: RTD #6 IS SHORT
1637 RTD6_OPEN: RTD #6 IS OPEN
1638 RTD5_SHORT: RTD #5 IS SHORT
1639 RTD5_OPEN: RTD #5 IS OPEN
1640 RTD4_SHORT: RTD #4 IS OPEN
1641 spare
1642 FUSE_LC OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE C
1643 FUSE_LB OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE B
1644 FUSE_LA OPEN LINE OR FUSE PHASE A
1645 VCO_FV4: F_TO_V4 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1646 VCO_FV3: F_TO_V3 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1647 VCO_FV2: F_TO_V2 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1648 VCO_FV1: F_TO_V1 block has no input from transducer (IT card)
1649 BACKUP_FAN_STUCK_ON: Backup Fan Stuck On
1650 MAIN_FAN_STUCK_ON: Main Fan Stuck On
1651 BACKUP_FAN_NOT_ON: Backup Fan Not On
1652 MAIN_ON_FAN_NOT_ON: Main Fan Not On
1653 XFER_TO_MAIN_FAN: Transfer to Main Fan
1654 XFER_TO_BACKUP_FAN: Transfer to Backup Fan
1655- SPARE:
1664

Controller #2 Modbus™ Holding Registers


Tables B-25 through B-40 list the Modbus holding registers for Controller #2. The same holding registers
are used for Controllers #4 and #6 (when present).

Table 45. Spare (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40001, 40002 SPARE
40003, 40004 SPARE
40005, 40006 SPARE
40007, 40008 SPARE
40009, 40010 SPARE
40011, 40012 SPARE
40013, 40014 SPARE
40015, 40016 SPARE

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 183

Table 46. Bridge 0 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40017 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40018 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40019 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40020 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40021 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40022 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40023 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40024 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40025 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40026 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40027 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40028 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40029 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40030 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40031 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40032 SPARE:

Table 47. Bridge 1 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40033 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40034 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40035 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40036 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40037 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40038 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40039 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40040 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40041 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40042 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40043 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40044 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40045 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40046 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40047 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


184 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40048 SPARE:

Table 48. Bridge 2 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40049 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40050 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40051 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40052 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40053 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40054 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40055 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40056 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40057 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40058 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40059 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40060 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40061 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40062 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40063 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40064 SPARE:

Table 49. Bridge 3 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40065 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40066 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40067 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40068 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40069 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40070 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40071 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40072 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40073 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40074 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40075 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40076 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 185

Register Variable Description


40077 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40078 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40079 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40080 SPARE:

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


186 9411300990 Rev C

Table 50. Bridge 4 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40081 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40082 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40083 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40084 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40085 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40086 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40087 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40088 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40089 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40090 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40091 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40092 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40093 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40094 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40095 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM

Table 51. Bridge 5 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40097 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40098 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40099 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40100 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40101 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40102 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40103 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40104 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40105 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40106 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40107 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40108 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40109 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40110 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40111 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40112 SPARE:

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev C 187

Table 52. Bridge 6 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40113 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40114 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40115 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40116 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40117 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40118 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40119 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40120 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40121 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40122 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40123 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40124 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40125 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40126 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40127 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40128 SPARE:

Table 53. Bridge 7 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40129 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40130 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40131 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40132 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40133 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40134 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40135 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40136 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40137 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40138 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40139 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40140 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40141 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40142 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40143 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


188 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40144 SPARE:

Table 54. Bridge 8 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40145 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40146 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40147 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40148 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40149 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40150 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40151 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40152 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40153 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40154 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40155 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40156 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40157 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40158 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40159 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40160 SPARE:

Table 55. Bridge 9 (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40161 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40162 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40163 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40164 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40165 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40166 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40167 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40168 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40169 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40170 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40171 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40172 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40173 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
Modbus Communication ECM-2
9411300990 Rev C 189

Register Variable Description


40174 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40175 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40176 SPARE:

Table 56. Bridge A (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40177 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40178 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40179 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40180 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40181 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40182 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40183 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40184 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40185 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40186 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40187 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40188 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40189 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40190 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40191 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40192 SPARE:

Table 57. Bridge B (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40193 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40194 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40195 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40196 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40197 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40198 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40199 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40200 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40201 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40202 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40203 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
ECM-2 Modbus Communication
190 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40204 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40205 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40206 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40207 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40208 SPARE:

Table 58. Bridge C (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40209 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40210 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40211 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40212 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40213 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40214 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40215 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40216 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40217 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40218 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40219 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40220 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40221 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40222 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40223 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40224 SPARE:

Table 59. Bridge D (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40225 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40226 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40227 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40228 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40229 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40230 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40231 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40232 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40233 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
Modbus Communication ECM-2
9411300990 Rev C 191

Register Variable Description


40234 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40235 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40236 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40237 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40238 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40239 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40240 SPARE:

Table 60. Bridge E (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40241 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AP
40242 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink AN
40243 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BP
40244 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink BN
40245 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CP
40246 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in
heatsink CN
40247 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40248 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40249 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40250 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40251 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40252 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40253 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40254 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40255 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40256 SPARE:

Table 61. Bridge F (Controller #2 Modbus Holding Registers)


Register Variable Description
40257 RTD AP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in heatsink AP
40258 RTD AN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in heatsink AN
40259 RTD BP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in heatsink BP
40260 RTD BN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in heatsink BN
40261 RTD CP_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in heatsink CP
40262 RTD CN_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in heatsink
CN
40263 AIR_DEGREES TEMP_MONITOR block in BCM must point to RTD in air
40264 SCRAP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40265 SCRAN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40266 SCRBP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM

ECM-2 Modbus Communication


192 9411300990 Rev C

Register Variable Description


40267 SCRBN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40268 SCRCP_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40269 SCRCN_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40270 BRG_POS_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40271 BRG_NEG_CURRENT: From CSL block in BCM
40272 SPARE:

Modbus Communication ECM-2


9411300990 Rev D 191

Maintenance
Preventative maintenance consists of periodic replacement of the backup battery and periodically
checking that the connections between the ECM-2 and the system are clean and tight. ECM-2 units are
manufactured using state-of-the-art, surface-mount technology. As such, Basler Electric recommends that
no repair procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric personnel.

Backup Battery
During a loss of operating power, ECM-2 timekeeping is maintained by a battery located in a holder on
the lower side of the module. Battery replacement every five years is recommended to maintain this
capability. The ECM-2 uses a BR2032 lithium coin battery (Basler P/N 38526). Battery replacement is
facilitated through the battery holder’s glide-out tray. Refer to Figure 125. Spent batteries should be
disposed of in an environmentally-responsible manner.

Caution
Replacement of the backup battery for the real-time clock should be
performed only by qualified personnel.
Do not short-circuit the battery, reverse battery polarity, or attempt to
recharge the battery. Observe polarity markings on the battery socket
when inserting a battery. Battery polarity must be correct in order to
provide backup for the real-time clock.

Note
Failure to replace the battery with Basler Electric P/N 38526 may void
the warranty.
When the system is connected to IRIG or NTP, the internal time clock
is updated automatically; therefore the backup battery is not
necessary.

ECM-2 0BMaintenance
192 9411300990 Rev D

+ +
+

05
6-
06
P0

Figure 125. Battery Replacement

0BMaintenance ECM-2
9411300990 Rev D 193

Specifications
ECM-2 electrical and physical specifications are listed in the following paragraphs.

Operating Power (2 Inputs)


Nominal ................................................................ 24 Vdc
Range ................................................................... 17 to 36 Vdc
Hold-Up (Ride Through) ....................................... 0.2 s
Burden .................................................................. 30 W

Analog Inputs (24)


Maximum Range .................................................. 57 Vdc/40 Vac rms

Analog Outputs (2)


Analog Voltage Output
Voltage Control Output Range ............................. ±10 Vdc or 0 to +10 Vdc
Burden .................................................................. 1 kΩ minimum

Analog Current Output


Current Control Output Range ............................. 4 to 20 mAdc
Burden .................................................................. 800 Ω maximum

Input Contacts (4)


Range ................................................................... 24 Vdc or 125 Vdc/120 Vac (switch-selectable)
Input contact switches are set at the factory according to the DECS-2100 system. For information on
changing the voltage range, refer to Installation.

Output Contacts (4)


Carry Ratings (Resistive)
24 Vdc/125 Vdc .................................................... 7.0 Adc
120 Vac ................................................................ 7.0 Aac

Make and Break Ratings (Resistive)


24 Vdc .................................................................. 7.0 Adc
125 Vdc ................................................................ 0.2 Adc
120 Vac ................................................................ 7.0 Aac

Regulation
Accuracy and Stability
Regulation Accuracy ............................................ ±0.1% over the load range, at rated power factor and
constant generator frequency
Steady-State Stability ........................................... ±0.2% at constant load and frequency

ECM-2 Training 0BSpecifications


194 9411300990 Rev D

Temperature Stability ........................................... ±0.5% between 0 and 50°C (32 and 122°F) at constant
load and frequency
Response Time .................................................... <1 cycle

Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)


Voltage Range ..................................................... 40 to 120% of rated generator terminal voltage
Frequency Range ................................................. 20 to 180 Hz (50/60 Hz systems)

AVR with Reactive Current Compensation


Compensation Range .......................................... ±20%
Time Constant Range .......................................... 0.1 to 4 s
Setting Accuracy .................................................. ±0.1%

Manual Regulation
Generator Field Current
Range ................................................................... 1 or 5% no-load to 125% full-load
Accuracy............................................................... ±0.5%

Generator Field Voltage


Range ................................................................... 5% no-load to 125% full-load
Accuracy............................................................... ±0.5%

Exciter Field Current


Range ................................................................... 1 or 5% no-load to 125% full-load
Accuracy............................................................... ±0.5%

Exciter Field Voltage


Range ................................................................... 5% no-load to 125% full-load
Accuracy............................................................... ±0.5%

Var Control Regulation


Range ................................................................... –100 to +100% of generator MVA rating
Accuracy............................................................... ±0.5%

PF Regulation
Range ................................................................... –0.5 to –1.0 leading, 0.5 to 1.0 lagging
Accuracy............................................................... ±0.5%

Setpoint Traverse Rate


Setting Range ...................................................... 5 to 200 s

Limiters
Minimum Excitation
Generator Capability Curve
Pickup Range ....................................................... 0 to 125% of generator MVA rating (leading)
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 60 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

0BSpecifications ECM-2 Training


9411300990 Rev D 195

Stability Limit Accuracy


Pickup Range ....................................................... 0 to 125% of generator MVA rating (leading)
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 60 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

Overexcitation
Pickup Range ....................................................... 100 to 130% of full-load field current or voltage
Time Delay ........................................................... Inverse time curve
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

Volts per Hertz


Pickup Range ....................................................... 100 to 130% of generator rating
Time Delay ........................................................... Inverse time, between 2 defined endpoints
Time Delay 1 Range ............................................ 10 to 1,000 s
Time Delay 2 Range ............................................ 0.2 to 10 s

Overvoltage
Pickup Range ....................................................... 100 to 130% of generator rating
Pickup Accuracy ................................................... ±0.5%
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 60 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

Undervoltage
Pickup Range ....................................................... 30 to 100% of generator rating
Pickup Accuracy ................................................... ±0.5%
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 60 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

Minimum Field Excitation


Pickup Range ....................................................... 0 to 100% of full-load field current or voltage
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 300 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

Instantaneous Overcurrent
Setpoint Range (52 breaker open) ....................... 10 to 120% of no-load field current
Setpoint Range (52 breaker closed) .................... 100 to 400% of full-load field current
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 60 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

Var
Setpoint Range .................................................... 0 to 200% of generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 300 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

Generator Line Current


Setpoint Range .................................................... 20 to 400% generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0 to 60 s
Accuracy............................................................... ±1%

ECM-2 Training 0BSpecifications


196 9411300990 Rev D

Protection Functions
Minimum Excitation
Generator Capability Curve
Pickup Range ....................................................... 0 to 125% of generator MVA rating (leading)
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 10 s

Stability Limit
Pickup Range ....................................................... 0 to 125% of generator MVA rating (leading)
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 10 s

Overexcitation
Pickup Range ....................................................... 100 to 140% of generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 10 s

Volts per Hertz


Pickup Range ....................................................... 100 to 140% of generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 10 s

Overvoltage
Pickup Range ....................................................... 110 to 160% of generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 20 s

Undervoltage
Pickup Range ....................................................... 30 to 100% of generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 20 s

Minimum Field Excitation


Pickup Range ....................................................... 0 to 100% of full-load field current or voltage
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 240 s

Instantaneous Overcurrent
Pickup Range ....................................................... 100 to 500% of rated generator or exciter field current
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 2 s

Var
Pickup Range ....................................................... 0 to 200% of generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 300 s

Generator Line Current


Pickup Range ....................................................... 100 to 200% of generator rating
Time Delay Range ............................................... 0.02 to 20 s

Alarm Indication
Generator Field Temperature Monitor
Low Temperature Level Setpoint Range ............. 40°C to 150°C (104°F to 302°F)
High Temperature Level Setpoint Range............. 40°C to 150°C (104°F to 302°F)
High Temperature Level Time Delay Range........ 0.2 to 20 s

0BSpecifications ECM-2 Training


9411300990 Rev D 197

Exciter Field Temperature Monitor


Low Temperature Level Setpoint Range ............. 40°C to 150°C (104°F to 302°F)
High Temperature Level Setpoint Range............. 40°C to 150°C (104°F to 302°F)
High Temperature Level Time Delay Range........ 0.2 to 20 s

Data Logger
Data log records are stored in non-volatile memory every 10 minutes.
Inputs per Record ................................................. 12
Sampling Rate Interval ......................................... 1 s minimum
Record Size .......................................................... 100,000 points per record

Event Recorder
Event records are stored in non-volatile memory once the event is captured.
Number of Event Records .................................... 4
Inputs per Record ................................................. 8
Sampling Rate Interval ......................................... 1 ms minimum
Record Size .......................................................... 100,000 points per record

Sequence of Events Recording


Up to 16,000 events are time- and date-stamped and stored in non-volatile memory.
Number of User-Programmable Inputs ................ 64

Metering Accuracy
Generator and Bus Voltage.................................. ±1%
Generator and Bus Frequency ............................. ±0.1 Hz
Generator Line Current ........................................ ±1%
Generator Apparent Power (VA) .......................... ±1%
Generator Active Power (W) ................................ ±1%
Generator Reactive Power (var) .......................... ±1%
Power Factor ........................................................ ±0.02 PF
Field Current and Voltage .................................... ±1%
Auxiliary Voltage and Current Input ..................... ±1%

Communication Interface
USB Ports (2)
USB 1 (Intended for Computer Interface)
Type ..................................................................... USB 2.0, Type-B
Data Transfer Speed ............................................ 12 MB/s (Full Speed)

USB 2 (Intended for Memory Storage Device)


Type ..................................................................... USB 2.0, Type-A
Data Transfer Speed ............................................ 12 MB/s (Full Speed)

ECM-2 Training 0BSpecifications


198 9411300990 Rev D

Ethernet Ports (2)


Type ..................................................................... RJ-45, eight-pin, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Maximum Length (One Network Segment) .......... 328 ft (100 m)

RS-485 Ports (3)


Type RJ-45, eight-pin
Data Transfer Speed ............................................ Minimum 115,200 baud

RS-232 Port (1)


Type D-sub, nine-pin
Data Transfer Speed ............................................ Maximum 115,200 baud

Backup Battery for Real-Time Clock


The backup battery maintains the real-time clock when neither IRIG nor NTP is connected.
Battery Replacement Interval ............................... Every 5 years
Battery Holdup Time with Power Off .................... Approximately 5 years
Battery Type ......................................................... Rayovac BR2032, lithium, coin-type, 3 Vdc, 195 mAh
Basler Electric P/N 38526

Environment
The ECM-2 meets the following standards.
EN-50178 (1998) .................................................. Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations
IEC 60068-1 (1992) .............................................. Basic Environmental Testing
IEC 60068-2-1 (2007) .......................................... Cold Test
IEC 60068-2-2 (2007) .......................................... Dry Test
IEC 60068-2-13 (1983) ........................................ Altitude
IEC 60068-2-30 (2005) ........................................ Damp Heat
IEC 60255-21-1 (1988) ........................................ Vibration
IEC 60255-21-2 (1988) ........................................ Shock and Bump
IEC 60255-22-1 (2007) ........................................ Oscillatory Test Wave (SWC)
IEC 61000-4-2 (2008) .......................................... Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 61000-4-3 (2008) .......................................... Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
IEC 61000-4-4 (2007) .......................................... Electrical Test Transient Burst
IEC 61000-4-5 (2008) .......................................... Surge Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6 (2008) .......................................... Conducted Disturbance Induced by RF Fields (Current
Injection)
IEC 61000-4-8 (2009) .......................................... Testing and Measurement Techniques (Power
Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
IEC 61000-6-2 (2005) .......................................... Generic Immunity
IEC 61000-6-4 (2006) .......................................... Generic Immunity

Operating and Storage Temperature


Operating Range .................................................. –40°C to +60°C (–104°F to +140°F)
Storage Range ..................................................... –40°C to +65°C (–104°F to +149°F)

Humidity
Operating Range .................................................. 0 to 95% non-condensing humidity

0BSpecifications ECM-2 Training


9411300990 Rev D 199

Altitude
Operating Range .................................................. Up to 1,000 meters (3,300 feet)

Agency Certifications
CE Compliance
In its intended use, this equipment conforms with the relevant union harmonization legislation:
Low Voltage Directive (LVD) ................................ 2014/35/EU
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .................. 2014/30/EU

NIIPT
NIIPT, JSC Russian certification

Patents
U.S. Patent #6,724,643
U.S. Patent #7,345,456
Other U.S. patents pending

Physical
Weight .................................................................. 2.26 kg (5.00 lb)
Size ...................................................................... Refer to the Mounting chapter

ECM-2 Training 0BSpecifications


200 9411300990 Rev D

0BSpecifications ECM-2 Training


12570 State Route 143 No. 59 Heshun Road Loufeng District (N) 111 North Bridge Road
Highland IL 62249-1074 USA Suzhou Industrial Park 15-06 Peninsula Plaza
Tel: +1 618.654.2341 215122 Suzhou Singapore 179098
Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445
email: info@basler.com Tel: +86 512.8227.2888 Fax: +65 68.44.8902
Fax: +86 512.8227.2887 email: singaporeinfo@basler.com
email: chinainfo@basler.com

Common questions

Powered by AI

RTD temperature monitoring blocks point to heatsink temperatures within bridge components, ensuring that each bridge's thermal state is within operational thresholds. This monitoring helps prevent overheating, maintains component integrity, and enhances the overall reliability and safety of the power control system by alerting operators to potential thermal faults .

Failing to correctly adjust damping in a power generation unit can result in machine oscillations and instability when operating online, which can diminish power quality and harm system reliability . Damping adjustments are crucial to ensure that the unit is not underdamped; underdamping can lead to undesirable oscillations, putting the generator at risk of exceeding its voltage or current ratings, potentially resulting in equipment damage . Ensuring optimal damping settings prevents such oscillations and contributes to the stable parallel operation of the generator with the power system . Additionally, improper damping can interfere with voltage regulation and excitation control, leading to potential overexcitation or underexcitation, both of which can threaten synchronism with the power system .

The event recorder configuration window simplifies the setup process by centralizing all relevant controls, thus eliminating the need to navigate to each block in the diagram or application configuration windows. This centralization allows users to change data inputs, adjust the number of samples and pre-trigger samples, and configure the number of active channels more efficiently .

For a dual-channel system, the procedures involve testing each power bridge in maintenance mode for component function, then transferring control to the redundant channel and repeating the tests. Post power component test, logic circuitry tests should commence with the machine field connected to the regulation logic for combined tests. It is crucial to first control the main channel and then replicate the procedure for the redundant channel to ensure full system validation .

Diagnostic alerts related to heat sink temperature include alarms for low and high-temperature conditions across multiple phases (e.g., SCRAN_LTEMP for low, SCRAP_HTEMP for high heat sink temperatures). These alerts are crucial for detecting overheating or cooling failures, prompting corrective actions to prevent hardware damage and ensure operational reliability .

The configuration of Modbus coil variables enhances the effective monitoring of power systems by mapping specific states and control functions to individual coil addresses, which allows for detailed monitoring and control of both local and remote human-machine interface (HMI) inputs, digital outputs, and various system status Indicators . By systematically assigning states to coil addresses (e.g., 001 to 064 for local HMI inputs and 097 to 160 for digital outputs), it ensures accurate real-time tracking and management of system components . This structured mapping provides clarity in operations and facilitates the integration of control inputs and outputs . Additionally, this configuration supports logical operations and provides an organized means to handle system functions like voltage matching, synchronization, and enable or disable control modes, enhancing the overall operational efficiency of power systems .

The successful configuration requires enabling reactive compensation functions, verifying settings with the end-user, and ensuring a 4-6% reactive droop setting for the regulator. The compensator should maintain this setting to achieve satisfactory operation, especially when aligning the generator's operation with system reactance requirements in parallel modes .

During the manual adjuster operation in manual control mode, reactive loading decreases when the adjuster is lowered and increases when raised. This relationship helps fine-tune the machine's reactive power contribution to the grid, enabling precise control over power flow and efficiency during operational transfers between control modes .

Monitoring the phase angle between current and voltage when a generator operates at unity power factor is critical because it ensures proper operation and stability of the power system. At unity power factor, the phase angle should be ideally 0 degrees, meaning that the current is in phase with the voltage. Any deviations can indicate issues in the system such as incorrect power factor settings or improper reactive power compensation . Additionally, maintaining the correct phase angle prevents inefficient operation, incorrect var output, and potential damage to equipment due to over or under excitation . Ensuring correct phase alignment also assists in verifying that reactive compensation functions are working correctly and that the system is synchronized with the power grid ."}

You might also like